accent 2010my owners manual
TRANSCRIPT
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 1/271
F1
All information in the Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication.However, Hyundai reserves the right to make changes at any time as part of ourpolicy of continual product improvement may be carried out.
This manual applies to all Hyundai models and includes descriptions and expla-nations of optional as well as standard equipment. As a result, you may findmaterial in this manual that does not apply to your specific vehicle.
OWNER'S MANUALA030A01A-AAT
OperationMaintenanceSpecifications
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 2/271
F2
A080A01S-AAT
TWO-WAY RADIO OR CELLULAR TELEPHONE INSTALLATION
Your vehicle is equipped with electronic fuel injection and other electronic components. It is possiblefor an improperly installed/adjusted two-way radio or cellular telephone to adversely affect electronicsystems. For this reason, we recommend that you carefully follow the radio manufacturer's instruc-tions or consult your Hyundai dealer for precautionary measures or special instructions if you chooseto install one of these devices.
!A070A01A-AAT
CAUTION: MODIFICATIONS TO YOUR HYUNDAI
Your Hyundai should not be modified in any way. Such modifications may adversely affect theperformance, safety or durability of your Hyundai and may, in addition, violate conditions of the limitedwarranties covering the vehicle. Certain modifications may also be in violation of regulationsestablished by the U.S. Department of Transportation and other federal or state agencies.
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 3/271
F3
!
A090A01A-AAT
SAFETY AND VEHICLE DAMAGE WARNING
This manual includes information titled as WARNING, CAUTION and NOTE.These titles indicate the following:
WARNING:This indicates that a condition may result in harm, serious injury or death to you or other personsif the warning is not heeded. Follow the advice provided with the warning.
CAUTION:This indicates that a condition may result in damage to your vehicle or its equipment if the cautionis not heeded. Follow the advice provided with the caution.
NOTE:This indicates that interesting or helpful information is being provided.
!
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 4/271
F4
A110A02A-AAT
VEHICLE DATA COLLECTION AND EVENT DATA RECORDERS
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is torecord, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hittinga road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle's systems performed. TheEDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a shortperiod of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record suchdata as:
o How various systems in your vehicle were operating;o Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened;
These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes andinjuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situationoccurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data(e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as lawenforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinelyacquired during a crash investigation.To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle orthe EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as lawenforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access tothe vehicle or the EDR.
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 5/271
F5
A040A01A-AAT
FOREWORD
Thank you for choosing Hyundai. We are pleased to welcome you to the growing number of discriminatingpeople who drive a Hyundai. The advanced engineering and high-quality construction of each Hyundai webuild is something of which we're very proud.
Your Owner's Manual will introduce you to the features and operation of your new Hyundai. It is suggestedthat you read it carefully because the information it contains can contribute greatly to the satisfaction youreceive from your new car.
The manufacturer also recommends that all service and maintenance on your car be performed by anauthorized Hyundai dealer. Hyundai dealers are prepared to provide high-quality service, maintenance andany other assistance that may be required.
A050A05A-AAT
HYUNDAI MOTOR AMERICA
Note : Because future owners will also need the information included in this manual, if you sell this Hyundai,please leave the manual in the vehicle for their use. Thank you.
CAUTION:Severe engine and transaxle damage may result from the use of poor quality fuels and lubricants thatdo not meet Hyundai specifications. You must always use high quality fuels and lubricants that meetthe specifications listed on Page 9-4 in the Vehicle Specifications section of the Owner's Manual andwhich also appear in the Service Station Information on the back cover of the Owner's Manual.
Copyright 2009 Hyundai Motor America. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced,stored in any retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means without the prior written permissionof Hyundai Motor America.
!
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 6/271
F6
A100A03A-AAT
Guide to Hyundai Genuine Parts1. What are Hyundai Genuine Parts?
Hyundai Genuine Parts are the sameparts used by Hyundai Motor Companyto manufacture vehicles. They are de-signed and tested for the optimum safety,performance, and reliability to our cus-
tomers.
2. Why should you use genuine parts?
Hyundai Genuine Parts are engineeredand built to meet rigid manufacturingrequirements. Using imitation, counter-feit or used salvage parts is not coveredunder the Hyundai New Vehicle Lim-ited Warranty or any other Hyundaiwarranty. In addition, any damage to or
failure of Genuine Hyundai Parts causedby the installation or failure of an imita-tion, counterfeit or used salvage part isnot covered by any Hyundai Warranty.
3. How can you tell if you are purchasingHyundai Genuine Parts?
Look for the Hyundai Genuine PartsLogo on the package (see below).
Hyundai Genuine Parts exported to theUnited States are packaged with labelswritten only in English.
Hyundai Genuine Parts are only soldthrough authorized HyundaiDealerships.
" To find the closest authorized dealercall 1-800-826-CARS "
A100A01L A100A02L A100A04L
A100A03L
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 7/271
F7
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 5
1
2
3
4
6
7
8
9
10
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY
CORROSION PREVENTION & APPEARANCE CARE
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS
CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS &
BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS
VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 8/271
F8
B250A02MC-AAT
OMC010001N-2
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 9/271
F9
1. Hood Release Lever................................................... 1-932. Front Fog Light Switch (If Installed) ............................ 1-82
3. Panel Brightness Control Knob (Rheostat Switch) .... 1-804. Instrument Cluster ....................................................... 1-605. Multi-Function Light Switch ......................................... 1-766. Cruise Control (If Installed) ....................................... 1-1037. Horn and Driver's Front Airbag ........................ 1-101, 1-428. Audio Remote Control Switch (If Installed) ............... 1-1029. Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch .............................. 1-78
10. Hazard Warning Light Switch ..................................... 1-81
11. Digital Clock ................................................................ 1-8212. "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" Indicator ..................... 1-4913. Rear Window Defroster Switch ................................... 1-8114. Audio System (If Installed) ........................................ 1-123
15. Passenger's Front Airbag ........................................... 1-4216. Glove Box .................................................................... 1-88
17. Heating/Air Conditioning Control Panel (If Installed) 1-10918. Multi Box ..................................................................... 1-8919. Cigarette Lighter ......................................................... 1-8220. AUX, USB and iPod ® Port ......................................... 1-10721. Power Outlet ............................................................... 1-8322. Ashtray ........................................................................ 1-8323. Shift Lever ..................................................................... 2-924. Parking Brake Lever ................................................... 1-91
25. Front Drink Holder ...................................................... 1-8426. Trunk Lid Release Lever (If Installed) ........................ 1-9727. Fuel Filler Lid Release Lever ..................................... 1-94
CAUTION:When installing a container of liquid air freshener inside the vehicle, do not place it near the instrument clusternor on the instrument panel surface. If there is any leakage from the air freshener onto these areas(Instrument cluster, instrument panel or air ventilator), it may damage these parts. If the liquid from the airfreshener does leak onto these areas, wash them with water immediately.
!
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 10/271
YOUR VEHICLE AT A GLANCE
F10
B255A03MC-AAT
INDICATOR SYMBOLS ON THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
* More detailed explanations of these items will be found begining on page 1-64.
SRS (Airbag) Warning Light
High Beam Indicator Light
Low Oil Pressure Warning Light
Parking Brake/Low Brake Fluid LevelWarning Light
Charging System Warning Light
Door Ajar Warning Light and Chime
Trunk Lid / Tail Gate Open Warning Light
Low Fuel Level Warning Light
Check Fuel Filler Cap Warning Light
Malfunction Indicator Light
Seat Belt Warning Light and Chime
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light
Cruise Indicator Light (If Installed)
Cruise SET Indicator Light (If Installed)
Low Tire Pressure Telltale (If Installed)
TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System) MalfunctionIndicator (If Installed)
ECO ECO Indicator (If Installed)
ABS Service Reminder Indicator (If Installed)
O/D OFF Indicator
(Automatic transaxle only)
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
Manual Transaxle Shift Indicator (If Installed)
Automatic Transaxle Position Indicator Light(If Installed)
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 11/271
F11
! PROPOSITION 65 WARNING:Items contained in motor vehicles oremitted from them are known to theState of California to cause cancer andbirth defects or reproductive harm.These include:
o Gasoline and its vaporso Engine exhausto Used engine oilo Interior passenger compartment
components and materialso Component parts which are subject
to heat and wearIn addition, battery posts, terminals and
related accessories contain lead, leadcompounds and other chemicals knownto the State of California to cause cancerand reproductive harm.
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 12/271
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
1
Fuel Recommendations ................................................ 1-2Breaking in Your New Hyundai .................................... 1-3Keys .............................................................................. 1-3
Door Locks ................................................................... 1-4Theft-Alarm System ...................................................... 1-8Window Glass ............................................................ 1-11Seats ........................................................................... 1-13Seat Belts ................................................................... 1-22Child Restraint System............................................... 1-31Advanced Supplemental Restraint (AIRBAG)System ...................................................................... 1-41
Instrument Cluster and Indicator Lights ..................... 1-60Warning and Indicator Lights ...................................... 1-64Trip Computer ............................................................. 1-73Multi-Function Light Switch ......................................... 1-76Windshield Wiper and Washer Switch ....................... 1-78
Sunroof ....................................................................... 1-84Mirror........................................................................... 1-89Hood Release ............................................................. 1-93Cruise Control System ............................................. 1-103Heating and Cooling Control .................................... 1-108Stereo Sound System .............................................. 1-119Antenna ..................................................................... 1-122Audio System ........................................................... 1-123
1
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 13/271
1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
2
!B010F01A-AAT
Operation in Foreign Countries
If you are going to drive your Hyundai inanother country, be sure to:
o Observe all regulations regarding reg-istration and insurance.
o Determine that acceptable fuel is avail-able.
B010E01A-AAT
Gasolines for Cleaner Air
To help contribute to cleaner air, Hyundairecommends that you use gasolinestreated with detergent additives, whichhelp prevent deposit formation in theengine. These gasolines will help theengine run cleaner and enhance perfor-mance of the Emission Control System.
FUEL RECOMMENDATIONS
UNLEADEDFUEL ONLY
B010A01MC-A
B010A02MC-AAT
Use Unleaded Gasoline
Unleaded gasoline with a Pump Octane
Rating of 87 (Research Octane Number91) or higher must be used in yourHyundai.
B010B01A-AAT
What About Gasohol?Gasohol (a mixture of 90% unleadedgasoline and 10% ethanol or grain alco-hol) may be used in your Hyundai. How-ever, if your engine develops driveabilityproblems, the use of 100% unleadedgasoline is recommended. Fuels with
unspecified quantities of alcohol, oralcohols other than ethanol, should notbe used.
B010C01A-AAT
Use of MTBE
Hyundai recommends that fuels contain-
ing MTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether)over 15.0% vol. (Oxygen Content 2.7%weight) should not be used in yourHyundai.Fuel containing MTBE over 15.0% vol.(Oxygen Content 2.7% weight) may re-duce vehicle performance and producevapor lock or hard starting.
B010D01A-AAT
Do Not Use Methanol
Fuels containing methanol (wood alco-hol) should not be used in your Hyundai.This type of fuel can reduce vehicle per-formance and damage components of
the fuel system.
CAUTION:Your Hyundai's New Vehicle Limited War-ranty may not cover damage to the fuelsystem and any performance problemsthat are caused by the use of fuels con-taining methanol or fuels containingMTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether) over15.0% vol. (Oxygen Content 2.7% weight.)
!
WARNING:o Do not "top off" after the nozzle au-
tomatically shuts off when refueling.o Tighten the cap until it clicks, other-
wise the " " light will illuminate.o Always check that the fuel cap is
installed securely to prevent fuelspillage in the event of an accident.
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 14/271
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
3
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
3BREAKING IN YOUR NEWHYUNDAI
B020A01S-AAT
During the First 1200 Miles (2000Km)
No formal "break-in" procedure is requiredwith your new Hyundai. However, youcan contribute to the economical opera-tion and durability of your Hyundai byobserving the following recommenda-tions during the first 1200 miles (2000km).
o Don't drive faster than 55 MPH (88 km/ h).
o While driving, keep your engine speed(rpm, or revolutions per minute) be-tween 2,000 rpm and 4,000 rpm.
o Use moderate acceleration. Don't startquickly or depress the acceleratorpedal fully.
o For the first 200 miles (300 km), try toavoid hard stops.
o Don't lug the engine (in other words,don't drive so slowly in too high a gearthat the engine "bucks"-shift to a lowergear).
o Whether going fast or slow, vary yourspeed from time to time.
o Don't let the engine idle longer than 3minutes at one time.
o Don't tow a trailer during the first 1,200miles (2,000 km) of operation.
KEYS
B030A01A-AAT
For greater convenience, the same keyoperates all the locks in your Hyundai.However, because the doors can belocked without a key, carrying a spare keyis recommended in case you accidentallylock one key inside the car.
OMC025001
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 15/271
1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
4
B040B02A-AAT
Locking and Unlocking Front Doorswith a Key
o The door can be locked or unlockedwith a key.o Lock the door by turning the key to-
ward the front of the vehicle and un-lock it by turning the key toward therear.
NOTE:The driver's door can be unlocked byturning the key once toward the rear. Ifyou wish to unlock all doors, turn the keyagain toward the rear within 4 seconds(With the central door locking system).
OMC025005
UNLOCK
LOCK
DOOR LOCKS
!
B030B01NF-GAT
Record Your Key Number
A code number is recorded on the num-
ber tag that came with the keys to yourHyundai. This key number tag should notbe left with the keys but kept in a safeplace, not in the vehicle. The key numbershould also be recorded in a place whereit can be found in an emergency.If you need additional keys, or if youshould lose your keys, your authorized
Hyundai dealer can make new keys if youcan supply the key number.
B030B01MC
B040A01A-AAT
WARNING:o Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
Before you drive away (especially ifthere are children in the car), be surethat all the doors are securely closedand locked so that the doors cannotbe opened from the inside. This helpsensure that the doors will not beopened accidentally. Also, when com-bined with the proper use of seatbelts, locking the doors helps keepoccupants from being ejected fromthe car in case of an accident.
o Before opening the door, always look for and avoid oncoming traffic.
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 16/271
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
5
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
5
The doors can be locked without a key.
To lock the doors, first push the insidelock switch to the "LOCK" position so thatthe red mark on the switch is not visible,then close the door.
NOTE:o When pushing the lock switch of the
passenger's door to the "LOCK" po-
sition, all doors can be locked.o If your vehicle is equipped with thecentral door locking system, the doorwill not lock if the key is left in theignition switch when the front doorsare closed.
B040C01MC-AAT
Locking from Outside
B040C04MC
o When locking the door from outside,be careful not to lock the door withthe ignition key left in the vehicle.
o To protect against theft, always re-move the ignition key, close all win-dows, and lock all doors and thetrunk lid (4 Door) / tail gate (3 Door)when leaving your vehicle unat-tended.
B040D01MC-AAT
Locking from the Inside
To lock the doors from the inside, simply
close the door and push the lock switchto the "LOCK" position.
NOTE:o When pushing the lock switch of the
passenger's door to the "LOCK" po-sition, all doors can be locked.
o When the door is locked, the red
mark on the switch is not visible.o The driver's door can be opened bypulling the inside door handle even ifthe inside lock switch is pushed tothe "LOCK" position.
OMC025006
UNLOCK
LOCK
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 17/271
1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
6
!
B040E04A-AAT
CHILD-PROTECTOR REAR DOORLOCK (4 Door)
Your Hyundai is equipped with left andright side "child-protector" rear door locks.
B040G01MC-AAT
Central Door Locks (If Installed)
The central door locking switch is lo-
cated on the driver's armrest. It is oper-ated by depressing the door lock switch.If any door is open when the switch isdepressed to the "LOCK" position, thedoor will remain locked when closed.
NOTE:o When depressing the front portion
of the door lock switch, all vehicledoors will lock.o When depressing the rear portion of
the switch, all vehicle doors will un-lock.
B040E01MC
WARNING:Be careful not to pull the inside doorhandle while driving. If you pull the insidedoor handle, the door can be opened andyou may be ejected from the vehicle andcan be injured or killed.
When the lock mechanism is engaged,the rear door cannot be opened from theinside. Its use is recommended when-ever there are small children in the rearseat.
To engage the child-protector feature sothat the door cannot be opened from theinside, move the child-protector lever tothe " " position and close the door. Movethe lever to the " " position when nor-mal door operation is desired.
To open the door from the outside, pullthe outside door handle.
OMC029047
UNLOCK LOCK
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 18/271
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
7
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
7
o The driver's door can be opened bypulling the inside door handle even ifthe front portion of the central doorlocking switch has been depressedto lock the doors.
o If the door is locked/unlocked mul-tiple times in rapid succession witheither the vehicle key or door lock switch, the system may stop operat-ing temporarily in order to protectthe circuit and prevent damage tosystem components.
o The central door locking is operatedby turning the key in the driver'sdoor lock toward the front or rear ofthe vehicle.
B070F03O-AAT
KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM(If Installed)
Unlocking doors
1. Push the "UNLOCK" button on thetransmitter.
2. Two turn unlock modeAt the same time the driver's door un-locks, the turn signal light will blink twiceto indicate that the system is unlocked.If you wish to unlock all doors, press the"UNLOCK" button on the transmitteragain within 4 seconds.
Central door unlock mode (If Installed)At the same time all doors unlock, theturn signal light will blink twice to indi-cate that the system is unlocked.
This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC rules.Operation is subject to the following twoconditions:1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and2. This device must accept any interfer-
ence received, including interferencethat may cause undesired operation.
! WARNING:Be careful not to pull the inside doorhandle while driving. If you pull the in-side door handle, the door can be openedand you may be ejected from the ve-
hicle and can be injured or killed.
! WARNING:Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’s au-thority to operate the equipment. If thekeyless entry system is inoperativedue to changes or modifications notexpressly approved by the party re-sponsible for compliance, it will not be
covered by your manufacturer’s ve-hicle warranty.
NOTE:Unlock mode conversion (two turn un-lock mode ↔↔↔↔↔ central door unlock mode)(If Installed)
The unlock mode is changed alternatelyby pressing the lock button and unlock button at the same time for 4 seconds ormore. The turn signal light will blink four
times to indicate that the mode conver-sion is completed.
3. At the same time all doors lock, theturn signal light will blink once to indi-cate that the system is locked.
Locking doors
1. Close all doors.2. Push the "LOCK" button on the trans-
mitter.
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 19/271
1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
8 THEFT-ALARM SYSTEM
B070A01A-AAT
(If Installed)This system is designed to provide pro-tection from unauthorized entry into thecar. This system is operated in threestages: the first is the "Armed" stage, thesecond is the "Alarm" stage, and the thirdis the "Disarmed" stage. If triggered, the
system provides an audible alarm withblinking of the turn signal lights.
!B070B02MC-A
B070B02MC-AAT
Armed Stage
Park the car and stop the engine. Arm thesystem as described in the following para-graph.
1) Remove the ignition key from the igni-tion switch.
2) Make sure that all doors, tail gate (3Door) and engine hood are closedand latched.
3) Lock the doors using the transmitter ofthe keyless entry system.
After completion of the steps above, theturn signal lights will blink once to indi-cate that the system is armed.
The system can be armed by locking thedoors with the key from the front doors ortail gate (3 Door). However, the hazardwarning lights are not operated.
NOTE:If any door, tail gate (3 Door) or enginehood remains open, the system will notbe armed. If this happens, rearm thesystem as described above.
CAUTION:o Do not arm the system until all pas-
sengers have left the car. If the sys-tem is armed while a passenger(s)remains in the car, the alarm may beactivated when the remainingpassenger(s) leaves the car.
LOCK
NOTE:The transmitter will not work if any offollowing occur:- The ignition key is in ignition switch.- You exceed the operating distance
limit (10 m).- The battery in the transmitter is weak.- Other vehicles or objects may be
blocking the signal.- The weather is extremely cold.- The transmitter is close to a radio
transmitter such as a radio stationor an airport which can interfere withnormal operation of the transmitter.
When the transmitter does not work correctly, open and close the door withthe ignition key. If you have a problemwith the transmitter, contact an autho-rized Hyundai Dealer.
NOTE:Keep the transmitter away from water orany liquid. If the keyless entry system isinoperative due to exposure to water orliquids, it will not be covered by yourmanufacturer vehicle warranty.
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 20/271
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
9
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
9
B070C02MC-AAT
Alarm Stage
The alarm will be activated if any of thefollowing occurs while the car is parkedand the system is armed.
1) Any door, tail gate (3 Door) included,is opened without using the transmitteror the ignition key.
2) The engine hood is opened.
The alarming horn will sound and the turnsignal lights will blink continuously for 27seconds (This happens 3 times). To turn
off the system, unlock the door with thetransmitter or the ignition key.
CAUTION:Avoid trying to start the engine while thesystem is armed.
!
B070D02MC-AAT
Disarmed Stage
The system will be disarmed when the
following step is taken:The doors are unlocked by depressingthe "UNLOCK" button on the transmitteror unlocked with the ignition key.
After depressing unlock button, the haz-ard warning lights will blink twice to indi-
cate that the system is disarmed.If any door, tail gate (3 Door) included, isnot opened within 30 seconds, the sys-tem will be rearmed.
B070D02MC-A
UNLOCK
o If the "LOCK" button is pressed oncemore within 4 seconds after pushingthe "LOCK" button on the transmit-ter, the alarming horn will sound onceto indicate that the system is armed.
B070E01MC-AAT
Panic Warning
1. Push the "PANIC" button on the trans-mitter.
2. At the same time, the alarming hornwill sound and the turn signal lightswill blink continuously for 30 seconds.
3. To turn off the system, push any buttonon the transmitter or lock/unlock thedoors by turning the key.
B070E02MC-A
NOTE:When the system is disarmed with theinterior light switched to "DOOR", theinterior light will illuminate for 30 sec-onds.
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 21/271
1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
10
Battery
1KMA2003
B070E02MC-AAT
Replacing the batteryWhen the transmitter's battery begins toget weak, it may take several pushes onthe button to lock or unlock the doors, andthe LED will not light. Replace the batteryas soon as possible.
Battery type : CR2032
Replacement instructions:
1. Carefully separate the case with ablade screwdriver.
2. Remove the old battery from the caseand note the polarity. Make sure thepolarity of the new battery is thesame(+side facing up), then insert it inthe transmitter.
CAUTION:An inappropriately disposed battery canbe harmful to the environment and hu-man health. Dispose the battery accord-ing to your local law(s) or regulation.
!CAUTION:Do not change, alter or adjust the theft-alarm system because it could causethe theft-alarm system to malfunctionand should only be serviced by an autho-rized Hyundai dealer.Malfunctions caused by improper alter-ations, adjustments or modifications tothe theft-alarm system are not coveredby your vehicle manufacturer warranty.
!
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 22/271
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
11
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
11WINDOW GLASS
!
3FDA2015
B050A01MC-AAT
To lower or raise the window, turn thewindow regulator handle clockwise orcounterclockwise.
WARNING:When opening or closing the windows,make sure your passenger's arms,hands and body are safely out of the way.
B060A03MC-AAT
POWER WINDOWS (If Installed)
The power windows operate when theignition key is in the "ON" position. Themain switches are located on the driver'sarmrest and control the front (4/3 Door)and rear windows (4 Door) on both sidesof the vehicle. The windows may beopened by depressing the appropriatewindow switch and closed by pulling upthe switch. To open the window on thedriver's side, press the switch (1) halfwaydown. The window moves as long as theswitch is operated. To fully open thedriver's window automatically, press theswitch fully down.In automatic operation, the window willfully open even if you let go of the switch.To stop at the desired opening, pull upand release the switch.
4 Door
3 Door
OMC029048
NOTE:While driving with the rear windows downor with the sunroof (if installed) in an open(or partially open) position, your vehiclemay demonstrate a wind buffetingor pulsation noise. This noise is a nor-mal occurrence and can be reduced oreliminated by taking the following ac-tions. If the noise occurs with one orboth of the rear windows down,partially lower both front windows ap-proximately one inch. If you experiencethe noise with the sunroof open, slightlyreduce the size of the sunroof opening.
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 23/271
1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
12
! WARNING:o Passengers can be injured if their
head, hands or other body parts aretrapped by a closing window. Al-ways check for obstructions beforeraising any window.
o NEVER leave the ignition key in thevehicle.
o NEVER leave any child unattendedin the vehicle. Even very youngchildren may inadvertently cause thevehicle to move, entangle them-selves in the windows, or otherwiseinjure themselves or others.
OMC025015
CLOSE
OPEN
! WARNING:o Do not attempt to operate the main
switch on the driver's door and aswitch on another door in opposingdirections at the same time. If this isdone, the window will stop and can-not be opened or closed.
OMC029049
In order to prevent operation of the pas-senger front (4/3 Door) and rear windows(4 Door), a window lock switch (2) is
provided on the armrest of the driver'sdoor. To disable the power windows,press the window lock switch. To revert tonormal operation, press the window lockswitch a second time.
NOTE:The power windows can be operated for
30 seconds after the ignition key isturned to the "ACC" or "LOCK" posi-tions, or removed from the ignitionswitch. If the front doors are openedduring this 30 second period, the powerwindows can no longer be operated with-out the ignition key turned to the "ON"position.
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 24/271
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
13
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
13SEATS
Driver’s seat
1. Seat forward/rearward lock releaselever
2. Seatback recliner control lever3. Seat cushion height control lever
Front passenger’s seat
4. Seat forward/rearward lock releaselever
5. Seatback recliner control lever
Rear seats
6. Seatback folding lever (If Installed)7. Armrest (If Installed)
B080A01MC-AAT
OMC029025B
4 Door
3 Door
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 25/271
1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
14
To move the seat toward the front or rear,pull the lock release lever upward. Thiswill release the seat on its track so youcan move it forward or rearward to thedesired position.When you find the position you want,release the lever and slide the seat for-
ward or rearward on its track until it locksinto the desired position and cannot bemoved further.
! WARNING:After adjusting the seat, always check that it is securely locked into place byattempting to move the seat forward orrearward without using the lock releaselever. Sudden or unexpected move-ment of the driver's seat could causeyou to lose control of the vehicle result-ing in an accident.
B080B03A-AAT
FRONT SEATSAdjusting Seat Forward and Rear-ward! WARNING:
o Never adjust the driver’s seat whilethe vehicle is moving. Any suddenor unexpected movement of the seat
could cause you to lose control ofthe vehicle resulting in an accident.Only adjust the driver’s seat whenthe vehicle is stationary.
o Do not sit or lean unnecessarily closeto the airbag. Position the seat sothat you can sit as far back as pos-sible from the airbag and still com-
fortably reach all controls.
B080A01FC-AAT
ADJUSTABLE SEATS
OMC029026
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 26/271
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
15
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
15
B080C02A-AAT
Adjusting Seatback Angle
To recline the seatback, lean forward to
take your weight off it, then pull up on therecliner control lever at the outside edgeof the seat. Now lean back until the de-sired seatback angle is achieved. To lockthe seatback into position, release therecliner control lever.
! WARNING:Riding with a reclined seatback in-creases your chance of serious or fatalinjuries in the event of a collision orsudden stop. The protection of yourrestraint system (seat belts and airbags)is greatly reduced by reclining your seat.Seat belts must be snug against yourhips and chest to work properly. Themore the seatback is reclined, the greaterthe chance that an occupant's hips willslide under the lap belt or the occupant'sneck will strike the shoulder belt. Driv-ers and passengers should always sitwell back in their seats, properly belted,and with the seatbacks upright.
OMC029027
C010104AMC
Headrest
The driver's and front passenger's seatsare equipped with a headrest for theoccupant's safety and comfort.The headrest not only provides comfortfor the driver and front passenger, butalso helps to protect the head and neckin the event of a collision.
OBH038075L
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 27/271
1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
16
Adjusting the height up and down
To raise the headrest, pull it up to thedesired position (1). To lower the head-
rest, push and hold the release button (2)on the headrest support and lower theheadrest to the desired position (3).
Removal
To remove the headrest, raise it as far asit can go then press the release button (1)
while pulling upward (2).To reinstall the headrest, put the headrestpoles (3) into the holes while pressing therelease button (1). Then adjust it to theappropriate height.
OMC029029 OMC029030
! WARNING:Make sure the headrest locks in positionafter adjusting it to properly protects theoccupants.
! WARNING:o For maximum effectiveness in case
of an accident, the headrest shouldbe adjusted so the middle of theheadrest is at the same height of thecenter of gravity of an occupant'shead. Generally, the center of grav-ity of most people's head is similarwith the height of the top of theireyes. Also, adjust the headrest asclose to your head as possible. Forthis reason, the use of a cushion thatholds the body away from theseatback is not recommended.
o Do not operate the vehicle with theheadrests removed as severe injuryto the occupants may occur in theevent of an accident. Headrests mayprovide protection against neck inju-ries when properly adjusted.
o Do not adjust the headrest positionof the driver's seat while the vehicleis in motion.
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 28/271
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
17
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
17
B080G01A-GAT
Adjusting Armrest Angle(Driver's side only)
The armrest will be raised or loweredmanually.To raise the armrest, pull it up.To lower it, press the armrest down.
OMC025031
B080F01MC-AAT
Seat Cushion Height Adjustment(Driver's Seat only)
To raise or lower the front part of the seatcushion, turn the knob forward or rear-ward.
OMC029028
B130A01A-AAT
REAR SEAT ENTRY (3 Door)
The front passenger's seatback should
be tilted to enter the rear seat.By pulling up on the recliner control lever(1) at the outside of the front passenger'sseat, the seatback will tilt forward and theseat will automatically slide forward.Rear seat occupants can tilt the frontpassenger's seatback by depressing thefoot lever (2) as shown in the illustration.
HTB258
(1)
(2)
! WARNING:Passengers sitting in the rear seat shouldbe careful not to accidentally press thefoot lever (2) while the vehicle is moving,as this may cause the seatback to move
forward and injure a front seat occupant.
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 29/271
1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
18
B085A01MC-GAT
REAR SEATAdjusting seatback angle (3 Door)
To recline the seatback, pull up theseatback folding lever (1) and push theseatback rearward.To return the seatback to an upright po-sition, pull up the seatback folding lever(1) and pull the seatback forward until theseatback locks into upright position.After adjusting the seatback angle, al-
ways check that it is securely locked intoplace.
B085A01MC
(1)
! WARNING:Do not adjust the seatback angle whilethe vehicle is in motion.
C010303BUN
Headrest
OBH038076L
The rear seat(s) is equipped with head-rests in all the seating positions for theoccupant's safety and comfort.The headrest not only provides comfortfor passengers, but also helps to protectthe head and neck in the event of acollision.
! WARNING:o For maximum effectiveness in case
of an accident, the headrest shouldbe adjusted so the middle of theheadrest is at the same height of thecenter of gravity of an occupant'shead. Generally, the center of grav-ity of most people's head is similarwith the height of the top of theireyes. Also, adjust the headrest asclose to your head as possible. Theuse of a cushion that holds the bodyaway from the seatback is not rec-ommended.
o Do not operate the vehicle with theheadrests removed as severe injuryto an occupant may occur in theevent of an accident. Headrests mayprovide protection against severeneck injuries when properly adjusted.
1FEATURESOFYOURHYUNDAI
1FEATURESOFYOURHYUNDAI
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 30/271
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
19
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
19
Adjusting the height up and down(If Installed)
To raise the headrest, pull it up to thedesired position (1). To lower the head-rest, push and hold the release button (2)on the headrest support and lower theheadrest to the desired position (3).
Removal (If Installed)
To remove the headrest, raise it as far asit can go then press the release button (1)
while pulling upward (2).To reinstall the headrest, put the headrestpoles (3) into the holes while pressing therelease button (1). Then adjust it to theappropriate height.
OMC029045
OMC029046
! WARNING:Make sure the headrest locks in positionafter adjusting it to properly protect theoccupants.
!
B110A02MC-AAT
Folding Rear SeatbacksThe rear seatbacks may be folded tofacilitate carrying long items or to increasethe luggage capacity of the vehicle.
WARNING:The purpose of the fold-down rearseatbacks is to allow you to carry longerobjects than could otherwise be accom-modated.Never allow passengers to sit on top ofthe folded down seatback or cargo areawhile the car is moving as this is not aproper seating position and no seat beltsare available for use. This could result inserious injury or death in case of anaccident or sudden stop. Objects car-ried on the folded down seatback shouldnot extend higher than the top of the frontseats. This could allow cargo to slideforward and cause injury or damageduring sudden stops.
1 FEATURESOFYOURHYUNDAI
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 31/271
1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
20
3. Pull up the seatback folding lever torelease the seatback.
o Before folding the seatback, insertthe buckle in the pocket. This canprevent the buckle from being dam-aged by the seatback.
B110A01MC
To fold down the seatback :
1. Slide the front seats forward and ad- just the front seatbacks to be uprightbefore folding the rear seatbacks down.
2. Lower the rear seat headrests to thelowest position.
B220D05MC
o In order to prevent the center shoul-der belt from being damaged whilefolding the rear seat, disconnect themetal tab (A) from the buckle (B). Todisconnect the metal tab (A) fromthe buckle (B) , insert a narrow-endedtool into the groove located on thebuckle (B).
! CAUTION:
B090A02MC
OMC029041
4 Door
3 Door
1FEATURESOFYOURHYUNDAI
1FEATURESOFYOURHYUNDAI
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 32/271
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
21
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
21
! CAUTION:
o Move the rear lap/shoulder belt tothe outside so that they don't inter-fere with the seatback when folding.
o Move the rear lap/shoulder belt tothe side so that it is clear of theseatback when returning to its up-right position.
o Place the rear seat belt to the properposition.
OMC025040
OMC025039
OMC029039
4 Door
3 Door
OMC029040
4 Door
3 Door 4. Fold down the seatback forward.
When you return the seatback to its up-
right position, always be sure it has lockedinto position by pushing on the top of theseatback.
OMC039100
1 FEATURESOFYOURHYUNDAI
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 33/271
1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
22 SEAT BELTS
B140A01S-AAT
REAR SEAT WARNING
For the safety of all passengers, luggageor other cargo should not be piled higherthan the top of the seatback. In addition,do not place objects on the rear shelf asthey may move forward during braking orin an accident and strike vehicle passen-
gers.
B140A01MC
!!
B150A02S-AAT
SEAT BELT PRECAUTIONS
WARNING:All occupants of the vehicle must weartheir seat belts at all times. Seat beltsand child restraints reduce the risk ofserious or fatal injuries for all occupantsin the event of a collision or sudden stop.Without a seat belt, occupants could beshifted too close to a deploying airbag,strike the interior structure or be thrownfrom the vehicle. Properly worn seatbelts greatly reduce these hazards. Evenwith advanced airbags, unbelted occu-pants can be severely injured by a de-ploying airbag. Always follow the pre-cautions about seat belts, airbags andoccupant safety contained in thismanual.
! WARNING:When you return the rear seatback to itsupright position after being folded down:Be careful not to damage the seat beltwebbing or buckle. Do not allow the seatbelt webbing or buckle to get caught orpinched in the rear seat. Ensure that theseatback is completely locked into itsupright position by pushing on the top ofthe seatback. Otherwise, in an accidentor sudden stop, the seat could fold downand allow cargo to enter the passengercompartment, which could result in se-rious injury or death.
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 34/271
1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 35/271
124
!B150F01A-AAT
One Person Per BeltTwo people (including children) shouldnever attempt to use a single seat belt.This could increase the severity of inju-ries in case of an accident.
B150G02A-AAT
Do Not Lie Down
To reduce the chance of injuries in theevent of an accident and to achieve maxi-mum effectiveness of the restraint sys-tem, all passengers should be sitting upand the front seats should be in an up-right position when the car is moving. Aseat belt cannot provide proper protec-tion if the person is lying down in the rearseat or if the front seat is in a reclinedposition.
WARNING:Riding with a reclined seatback in-creases your chance of serious or fatalinjuries in the event of a collision orsudden stop. The protection of yourrestraint system (seat belts and airbags)is greatly reduced by reclining your seat.Seat belts must be snug against yourhips and chest to work properly. Themore the seatback is reclined, the greaterthe chance that an occupant's hips willslide under the lap belt causing seriousinternal injuries or the occupant's neck could strike the shoulder belt. Driversand passengers should always sit wellback in their seats, properly belted (seepage 1-26), and with the seatbacks up-right.
C020302AKM
Restraint of pregnant womenPregnant women should wear lap/shoul-der belt assemblies whenever possibleaccording to specific recommendationsby their doctors. The lap portion of the beltshould be worn AS SNUGLY AND LOWAS POSSIBLE.
B150E01A-AAT
Injured Person
A seat belt should be used when aninjured person is being transported. Whenthis is necessary, you should consult aphysician for recommendations.
! WARNING - Pregnant womenPregnant women must never place thelap portion of the safety belt over thearea of the abdomen where the fetus islocated or above the abdomen where thebelt could crush the fetus during an im-pact.
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 36/271
125
125
!
B160A02A-AAT
CARE OF SEAT BELTSSeat belt systems should never be disas-sembled or modified. In addition, careshould be taken to assure that seat beltsand belt hardware are not damaged byseat hinges, doors or other abuse.
WARNING:When you return the rear seatback to itsupright position after the rear seatback was folded down, be careful not to dam-age the seat belt webbing or buckle. Besure that the webbing or buckle does notget caught or pinched in the rear seat. Aseat belt with damaged webbing or bucklewill not be as strong and could possiblyfail during a collision or sudden stop,resulting in serious injury.
B160D01A-AAT
When to Replace Seat Belts
Entire in-use seat belt assemblies shouldbe replaced if the vehicle has been in-volved in an accident. This should bedone even if no damage is visible. Addi-tional questions concerning seat beltoperation should be directed to yourHyundai Dealer.
B160C01A-AAT
Keep Belts Clean and Dry
Seat belts should be kept clean and dry.If belts become dirty, they can be cleanedby using a mild soap solution and warmwater. Bleach, dye, strong detergents orabrasives should not be used becausethey may damage and weaken the fabric.
B170A02MC-AAT
HEIGHT ADJUSTABLE FRONT SEATSHOULDER BELT
B170A01MC
You can adjust the height of the shoulderbelt anchor to one of the 4 positions formaximum comfort and safety.If the height of the adjusting seat belt istoo near your neck, you will not be gettingthe most effective protection. The shoul-der portion should be adjusted so that itlies across your chest and midway overyour shoulder nearest the door and notyour neck. To adjust the height of the seatbelt anchor, lower or raise the heightadjuster into an appropriate position. Toraise the height adjuster, pull it up.
B160B01A-AAT
Periodic InspectionIt is recommended that all seat belts beinspected periodically for wear or dam-age of any kind. Parts of the system thatare damaged should be replaced as soonas possible.
1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 37/271
126
To fasten your seat belt, pull it out of theretractor and insert the metal tab into thebuckle. There will be an audible "click"when the tab locks into the buckle.The seat belt automatically adjusts to theproper length only after the lap belt isadjusted manually so that it fits snugly
around your hips. If you lean forward in aslow, easy motion, the belt will extendand let you move around. If there is asudden stop or impact, however, the beltwill lock into position. It will also lock if youtry to lean forward too quickly.
B180A01MC-AAT
SEAT BELT-Driver's 3-Point Systemwith Emergency Locking RetractorTo Fasten Your Belt
B180A01NF
! WARNING:o Verify the shoulder belt anchor is
locked into position at the appropri-ate height. Never position the shoul-der belt across your neck or face.Improperly positioned seat belts cancause serious injuries in an acci-dent.
o Failure to replace seat belts after anaccident could leave you with dam-aged seat belts that will not provideprotection in the event of anothercollision leading to personal injury ordeath. Replace your seat belts afterbeing in an accident as soon as pos-sible.
To lower it, push it down while pressingthe height adjuster button. Release thebutton to lock the anchor into position. Trysliding the height adjuster to make surethat it has locked into the position.
OMC025042-1
! CAUTION:o Adjust the shoulder belt height whenyou sit well back in the seat.
o When adjusting the shoulder beltheight, grip the height adjuster but-ton securely and slide the heightadjuster up or down.
o If the shoulder belt anchor is notmoved, grasp the shoulder part ofthe belt and pull forward to the full.
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 38/271
2727
NOTE:If the seat belt is not fastened when theignition key is turned from the "OFF"position to the "ON" position, the seatbelt warning will activate to remind thedriver to fasten the seat belt as follows.
The driver's seat belt warning light andchime will activate to the following tablewhen the ignition switch is in "ON" posi-tion.
B265E01MC-AAT
Seat Belt Warning Lightand Chime
Conditions Warning Pattern
Seat Belt Vehicle Speed Light-Blink Chime-Sound
Unbuckled
Buckled
Buckled →→→→→ Unbuckled
Unbuckled
Above 6mph(10 km/h)
↓Below 3mph
(5 km/h)
6 seconds
6 seconds
6 seconds *1)↓
Stop *2)
6 seconds None
B190A03A-AAT
SEAT BELTS-Front Passenger andRear Seat 3-Point System with Com-bination Locking Retractor :To Fasten Your Belt
Combination retractor type seat belts areinstalled in the rear seat outboard andcenter positions to help accommodatethe installation of child restraint systems.Hyundai strongly recommends that chil-dren always be seated in the rear seat .NEVER place any infant restraint systemin the front seat of the vehicle.This type of seat belt combines the fea-tures of both an emergency locking re-tractor seat belt and an automatic lockingretractor seat belt. To fasten your seatbelt, pull it out of the retractor and insertthe metal tab into the buckle. There willbe an audible "click" when the tab locksinto the buckle. When not securing a childrestraint, the seat belt operates in thesame way as the driver's seat belt (Emer-gency Locking Retractor Type). It auto-matically adjusts to the proper length onlyafter the lap belt portion of the seat belt isadjusted manually so that it fits snuglyaround your hips.
*1) Warning pattern repeats 11 times withan interval of 24 seconds. If the driver'sseat belt is buckled, the light will stopwithin 6 seconds and chime will stopimmediately.
*2) The light will stop within 6 secondsand chime will stop immediately.
1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 39/271
28
! WARNING:
!
B200A01A-AAT
Adjusting Your Seat Belt
WARNING:You should place the lap belt portion aslow as possible and snugly across yourhips, not on your waist. If the lap belt islocated too high on your waist, it mayincrease the chance of injury in the eventof a collision. Both arms should not beunder or over the belt. Rather, one shouldbe over and the other under, as shown inthe illustration.Never wear the seat belt under the armnearest the door.
B200A01NF
o Children age 12 and younger mustalways be properly restrained in therear seat. Never allow children toride in the front passenger seat. If achild over 13 must be seated in thefront seat, he/she must be properlybelted and the seat should be movedas far back as possible.
o Never wear the shoulder belt underyour arm or behind your back. Animproperly positioned shoulder beltcan cause serious injuries in a crash.The shoulder belt should be posi-tioned midway over your shoulderacross your collarbone.
o Avoid wearing twisted seat belts. Atwisted belt can't do its job as well. Ina collision, it could even cut into you.Be sure the belt webbing is straightand not twisted.
o Be careful not to damage the beltwebbing or hardware. If the belt web-bing or hardware is damaged, re-place it.
When the seat belt is fully extended from
the retractor to allow the installation of achild restraint system, the seat belt opera-tion changes to allow the belt to retract,but not to extend (Automatic LockingRetractor Type). See page 1-38.
NOTE:Although the combination retractor pro-
vides the same level of protection forseated passengers in either emergencyor automatic locking modes, it is recom-mended that seated passengers use theemergency locking feature for improvedconvenience. The automatic lockingfunction is intended to facilitate childrestraint installation. To convert fromthe automatic locking feature to theemergency locking operation mode, al-low the unbuckled seat belt to fully re-tract.
! WARNING:
o For maximum restraint system pro-tection, seat belts must always beused whenever the car is moving.
o Seat belts are most effective whenseatbacks are in the upright posi-tion.
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 40/271
2929
B210A01A-AAT
To Release the Seat Belt
The seat belt is released by pressing therelease button in the locking buckle. Whenit is released, the belt should automati-cally draw back into the retractor.If this does not happen, check the belt tobe sure it is not twisted, then try again.
B210A01NF
B220D02MC-AAT
SEAT BELTS - Rear Seat Center 3-Point System With Emergency Lock-ing Retractor
1. Before fastening the rear seat centerbelt, confirm the metal tab (A) andbuckle (B) are latched together.
B220D01MC
2. After confirming that (A) and (B) arelatched, pull the seat belt out of theretractor and insert the metal tab (C)into the buckle (D).
B220D02MC
1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 41/271
30
! WARNING:o Never let anyone ride in the rear
center seat without fastening allmetal tabs and buckles as describedin this section. This seat belt isdesigned to function as a typical 3-point restraint (lap/shoulder belt).
Using only the shoulder portion orlap portion of the belt can result inserious or fatal injuries in the eventof a collision or sudden stop.
o Never unlock the metal tab (A) andthe buckle (B) with the following ex-ceptions.(1) In case of folding rear seatbacks
down.(2) If transporting an object on the
rear seat may cause damage tothe rear seat center belt.
B220D04MC
There will be an audible "click" when thetab locks in the buckle. The seat beltautomatically adjusts to the proper lengthonly after the lap belt is adjusted manu-ally so that it fits snugly around your hips.If you lean forward in a slow, easy motion,the belt will extend and let you movearound. If there is a sudden stop or im-pact, the belt will lock into position. It willalso lock if you try to lean forward tooquickly.
NOTE:Confirm the metal tab and the bucklemarked "CENTER" are latched together.
B220D03MC
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 42/271
3131
!
B220D05MC
To disconnect the metal tab (A) from thebuckle (B), insert a narrow-ended toolinto the groove located on the buckle (B).
WARNING:Always lock metal tab (A) into buckle (B)immediately after returning the rearseatbacks to an upright position. Thisportion of the rear center seat belt shouldonly be unbuckled when the rear
seatback is folded down.
!
B220C02A-GAT
To Release the Seat Belt
When you want to release the seat belt,
press the button in the locking buckle.
WARNING:When fastening the outboard seat beltsor the center seat belt, make sure theyare inserted into the correct buckles toobtain maximum protection from the seatbelt system and assure proper opera-tion.
B210A01NF
CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM
B230A05A-AAT
Children riding in the car should sit in therear seat and must always be properlyrestrained to minimize the risk of injury inan accident, sudden stop or suddenmaneuver. According to accident statis-tics provided by the National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration (NHTSA),children are safer when properly re-strained in the rear seats than in the frontseat. Larger children not in a child re-straint should use one of the seat beltsprovided.All 50 states have child restraint laws.You should be aware of the specific re-quirements in your state. Child and/orinfant safety seats must be properly placedand installed in the rear seat . You mustuse a commercially available child re-straint system that meets the requirementsof the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-dards (FMVSS).Child restraint systems are designed tobe secured in vehicle seats by lap beltsor the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulderbelt, or by a LATCH system (If Installed).Children could be injured or killed in acrash if their restraints are not properlysecured.
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 43/271
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 44/271
3333
! WARNING:o Never allow a child to stand-up or
kneel on the seat or floorboard of amoving vehicle. During a collision orsudden stop, the child can be vio-lently thrown against the vehicle'sinterior, resulting in serious injury.
o Never use an infant carrier or a childsafety seat that "hooks" over aseatback, it may not provide ad-equate security in an accident.
o Seat belts can become very hot, es-pecially when the car is parked indirect sunlight. Always check seatbelt buckles before fastening themover a child.
o Always store or secure a child seat,even when it is not in use. During acollision or sudden stop, the childseat could be thrown inside the ve-hicle.
B230B01E-AAT
Using a Child Restraint System withthe "Tether Anchorage" System
For small children and babies, the use ofa child seat or infant seat is required. Thischild seat or infant seat should be ofappropriate size for the child and shouldbe installed in accordance with themanufacturer's instructions. It is furtherrequired that the seat be placed in thevehicle's rear seat since this can make animportant contribution to safety. Your ve-hicle is provided with three child restrainthook holders for installing the child seator infant seat.
B230C02MC-AAT
Installing a Child Restraint Seat withthe "Tether Anchorage" System(4 Door)
Three child restraint hook holders arelocated on the rear seat package tray.
To install the child restraint seat
B230C01MC
1. Open the tether anchor cover on therear seat package tray.
1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 45/271
34
B230E02MC-AAT
Installing a Child Restraint Seat withthe "Tether Anchorage" System(3 Door)
Three child restraint hook holders arelocated on the rear floor panel.
To install the child restraint seat
! WARNING:o A child can be seriously injured or
killed in a collision if the child re-straint is not properly anchored.Always follow the child seatmanufacturer’s instructions for in-stallation and use.
o Never mount more than one childrestraint to a single tether or to asingle lower anchorage point. Theincreased load caused by multipleseats may cause the tethers or an-chorage points to break, causingserious injury or death.
1. Open the tether anchor cover on therear floor panel.
B230E01MC
2. Route the child restraint seat strapover the seatback.For vehicles with adjustable headrests,route the tether strap under the head-rest and between the headrest posts,otherwise route the tether strap overthe top of the seatback.
3. Connect the tether strap hook (2) to thechild restraint hook holder (1) andtighten to secure the seat.
B230C02MC
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 46/271
3535
B230C02MC
2. Route the child restraint seat strapover the seatback.For vehicles with adjustable headrests,route the tether strap under the head-rest and between the headrest posts,otherwise route the tether strap overthe top of the seatback.
3. Connect the tether strap hook (2) to thechild restraint hook holder (1) throughthe hole on the covering shelf andtighten to secure the seat.
! WARNING:o A child can be seriously injured or
killed in a collision if the child re-straint is not properly anchored.Always follow the child seatmanufacturer’s instructions for in-stallation and use.
o Never mount more than one childrestraint to a single tether or to asingle lower anchorage point. Theincreased load caused by multipleseats may cause the tethers or an-chorage points to break, causingserious injury or death.
B230D08E-AAT
Securing the Child Restraint Seatwith the "Child Seat Lower Anchor"system
Some child seat manufacturers makesafety seats that are labeled as LATCH orLATCH-compatible child seats. LATCHstands for "Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children". These seats include tworigid or webbing mounted attachmentsthat connect to two LATCH anchors at
specific seating positions in your vehicle.This type of child seat eliminates theneed to use seat belts to attach the childseat in the rear seats.LATCH anchors have been provided inyour vehicle. The LATCH anchors arelocated in the left and right outboard rearseating positions.
B230D01MC
1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 47/271
36
Child restraint symbols are located on theleft and right rear seatbacks to indicatethe position of the lower anchors for childrestraints.
OMC029201N
Lower Anchor
Lower AnchorPosition Indicator!
o When using the vehicle’s “LATCH”system to install a child restraintsystem in the rear seat, all unusedvehicle rear seat belt metal latchplates or tabs must be latched se-curely in their seat belt buckles and
the seat belt webbing must be re-tracted behind the child restraint toprevent the child from reaching andtaking hold of unretracted seat belts.Unlatched metal latch plates or tabsmay allow the child to reach theunretracted seat belts which mayresult in strangulation and a serious
injury or death to the child in the childrestraint.
WARNING:
WARNING:o A child can be seriously injured or
killed in a collision if the child re-straint is not properly anchored.Always follow the child seatmanufacturer’s instructions for in-stallation and use.
o Never install a child restraint usingthe LATCH lower anchors at the cen-ter position of the rear seat. In acrash, the LATCH lower anchors may
break if a car seat is improperlyplaced in the center position result-ing in serious or fatal injuries. Onlyplace a LATCH or LATCH-compat-ible child seat in the left or right out-board rear seating positions (asshown) to the appropriate LATCHanchors provided.
o Never mount more than one childrestraint to a single tether or to asingle lower anchorage point. Theincreased load caused by multipleseats may cause the tethers or an-chorage points to break, causingserious injury or death.
!
Their locations are shown in the illustra-
tion. There is no LATCH anchor providedfor the center rear seating position.
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
37
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
37
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 48/271
3737
Follow the child seat manufacturer's in-structions to properly install child restraintseats with LATCH or LATCH-compatibleattachments.
Once you have installed the LATCH childrestraint seat, assure that the seat is prop-erly attached to the LATCH and tetheranchors. Also, test the safety seat beforeyou place the child in it. Tilt the seat fromside to side. Also try to tug the seat for-ward. Check to see if the anchors hold theseat in place.
!
B230F01A-AAT
Child Restraint System Installationon Rear Seat Center Position
Use the center seat belt for the rear seatto secure the child restraint system asillustrated. After installation of the childrestraint system, rock the child seat backand forth, and side to side to ensure thatit is properly secured by the seat belt. Ifthe child seat moves, readjust the lengthof the seat belt. Then, if equipped, insertthe child restraint tether strap hook intothe child restraint hook holder and tightento secure the seat. Always refer to thechild restraint system manufacturer's rec-ommendation before installing the childrestraint system in your vehicle.
B230F02MC
B230D03MC
! CAUTION:Do not allow the rear seat belt webbing toget scratched or pinched by the childseat latch and LATCH anchor during theinstallation.
WARNING:A child can be seriously injured or killedin a collision if the child restraint is notproperly anchored to the car and thechild is not properly restrained in thechild restraint. Always follow the child
seat manufacturer’s instructions for in-stallation and use.
1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
38
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 49/271
38
! WARNING:o If the retractor is not in the Auto-
matic Locking mode, the child re-straint can move when your vehicleturns or stops suddenly. A child canbe seriously injured or killed if thechild restraint is not properly an-
chored to the car, including settingthe retractor to the Automatic Lock-ing mode.
o Do not install any child restraint sys-tem in the front passenger seat.Should an accident occur and causethe passenger side airbag to deploy,it could severely injure or kill an
infant or child seated in an infant orchild seat. Therefore, only use a childrestraint system in the rear seat ofyour vehicle.
o Before installing a Child RestraintSystem to vehicles fitted with CurtainAirbags, always refer to safety no-tices for Curtain Airbag systems inthis manual. Whenever installing childrestraints, use only approved devicesand refer to the "Child Restraint Sys-tem" section to ensure correct instal-lation and that occupant protection ismaximized.
If the retractor is in the automatic locking
mode, the belt will be locked. After instal-lation of the child restraint system, try tomove it in all directions to be sure thechild restraint system is securely installed.If you need to tighten the belt, pull morewebbing toward the retractor. When youunbuckle the seat belt and allow it toretract, the retractor will automatically
revert back to its normal seated passen-ger emergency locking usage condition.
NOTE:o Before installing the child restraint
system, read the instructions sup-plied by the child restraint systemmanufacturer.
o If the seat belt does not operate asdescribed, have the system checkedimmediately by your authorizedHyundai dealer.
To install a child restraint system in theoutboard rear seats, extend the shoulder/ lap belt entirely from its retractor until a"click" is felt. This will engage the seat beltretractor automatic locking feature, whichallows the seat belt to retract but notextend. Install the child restraint system,buckle the seat belt and allow the seatbelt to take up any slack. Make sure thatthe lap portion of the belt is tight aroundthe child restraint system and the shoul-der portion of the belt is positioned so thatit cannot interfere with the child's head orneck. Also, double check to be sure thatthe retractor has engaged the automaticlocking feature by trying to extend web-bing out of the retractor.
B230G02MC-AAT
Child Restraint System Installationon Outboard Rear Seats
OMC039304
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
39
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
39
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 50/271
3939
The seat belt pre-tensioner system con-sists mainly of the following components.Their locations are shown in the illustra-tion.
1. SRS airbag warning light2. Seat belt pre-tensioner assembly3. SRS control module
When the vehicle stops suddenly, or if theoccupant tries to lean forward too quickly,the seat belt retractor will lock into posi-tion. In certain frontal collisions, the pre-tensioner will activate and pull the seatbelt into tighter contact against theoccupant's body.
Passenger's
airbag
B180D01MC
Driver's airbag 1
23
NOTE:o Both the dr iver' s and f rontpassenger's pre-tensioner seat belts
will be activated in certain frontalcollisions. The pre-tensioner seatbelts can be activated alone or,where the frontal collision is severeenough, together with the airbags.The pre-tensioners will not be acti-
vated if the seat belts are not beingworn at the time of the collision.
! WARNING:To obtain maximum benefit from a pre-tensioner seat belt:
The seat belt must be work correctly andadjusted to the proper position (seepages 1-25 and 1-26). Please read and
follow all of the important informationand precautions about your vehicle’soccupant safety features – including seatbelts and advanced airbags – that areprovided in this manual.
B180C03MC-AAT
Pre-Tensioner Seat Belt
Your Hyundai vehicle is equipped withdriver's and front passenger's pre-tensioner seat belts. The purpose of thepre-tensioner is to make sure that theseat belts fit tightly against the occupant'sbody in certain frontal collisions. The pre-tensioner seat belts can be activated aloneor, where the frontal collision is severeenough, together with the airbags.
OED030300
1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
40
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 51/271
40
!
! WARNING:o Pre-tensioners are designed to op-
erate only one time. After activation,pre-tensioner seat belts must bereplaced. All seat belts, of any type,should always be replaced after theyhave been worn during a collision.
o The pre-tensioner seat belt assem-bly mechanisms become hot duringactivation. Do not touch the pre-
tensioner seat belt assemblies forseveral minutes after they have beenactivated.
o Do not attempt to inspect or replacethe pre-tensioner seat belts your-self. This must be done by an autho-rized Hyundai dealer.
o Do not strike the pre-tensioner seatbelt assemblies.
o Do not attempt to service or repairthe pre-tensioner seat belt system inany manner.
o Improper handling of the pre-tensioner seat belt assemblies, andfailure to heed the warnings to notstrike, modify, inspect, replace, ser-vice or repair the pre-tensioner seat
belt assemblies may lead to improp-er operation or inadvertent activa-tion and serious injury.
o Always wear the seat belts whendriving or riding in a motor vehicle.
o If the vehicle or pre-tensioner seatbelt must be discarded, contact anauthorized HYUNDAI dealer.
WARNING:
CAUTION:o The sensor that activates the SRSairbag is connected with the pre-tensioner seat belt. The SRS airbagwarning light on the instrumentpanel will illuminate for approximately6 seconds after the ignition key hasbeen turned to the "ON" position,
and then it should turn off.o If the pre-tensioner seat belt is notworking properly, this warning lightwill illuminate even if there is no mal-function of the SRS airbag.
!
o When the pre-tensioner seat belts
are activated, a loud noise may beheard and fine dust, which may ap-pear to be smoke, may be visible inthe passenger compartment. Theseare normal operating conditions andare not hazardous.
o Although it is harmless, the fine dustmay cause skin irritation and should
not be breathed for prolonged peri-ods. Wash your hands and face thor-oughly after an accident in which thepre-tensioner seat belts were acti-vated.
If the SRS airbag warning light doesnot illuminate when the ignition keyis turned to the "ON" position, re-mains illuminated after approxi-mately 6 seconds when the ignitionkey is turned to the "ON" position, orif it illuminates while the vehicle isbeing driven, have an authorizedHyundai dealer inspect the advancedSRS airbag system as soon as pos-sible.
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
41
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
41ADVANCED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT (AIRBAG) SYSTEM (SRS)
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 52/271
41
B240D01MC-AAT
(If Installed)
( ) ( )
1. Driver's front airbag2. Passenger's front airbag3. Side impact airbag4. Curtain airbag
B240D01MC
1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
42
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 53/271
B240A01MC
The purpose of the SRS is to provide the
vehicle's driver and/or the front passen-ger with additional protection than thatoffered by the seat belt system alone incase of a frontal impact of sufficient sever-ity. The SRS uses sensors to gather infor-mation about the driver's and frontpassenger's seat position, the driver's andfront passenger's seat belt usage and
impact severity.
The driver's and front passenger's seattrack position sensors (If Installed), whichare installed on the seat track, determineif the seats are fore or aft of a referenceposition. The seat belt buckle sensorsdetermine if the driver and front
passenger's seat belts are fastened.These sensors provide the ability to con-trol the SRS deployment based on howclose the driver's seat is to the steeringwheel, how close the passenger's seat isto the instrument panel, whether or notthe seat belts are fastened, and howsevere the impact is.
The advanced SRS offers the ability to
control the airbag inflation with two lev-els. A first stage level is provided formoderate-severity impacts. A secondstage level is provided for more severeimpacts.
According to the impact severity, seatingposition and seat belt usage, the
SRSCM(SRS Control Module) controlsthe airbag inflation. Failure to properlywear seat belts can increase the risk orseverity of injury in an accident.
Additionally, your Hyundai is equippedwith an occupant classification system inthe front passenger's seat. The occupant
classification system detects the pres-ence of a passenger in the frontpassenger's seat and will turn off the frontpassenger's airbag under certain condi-tions. For more detail, see "Occupant Clas-sification System" later in this section.
B240A03NF-AAT
Driver's and Passenger's FrontAirbag
Your Hyundai is equipped with an ad-
vanced Supplemental Restraint (Airbag)System and lap/shoulder belts at both thedriver and passenger seating positions.The indications of the system's presenceare the letters "SRS AIRBAG" embossedon the airbag pad cover in the steeringwheel and the passenger's side frontpanel pad above the glove box.
The Hyundai SRS consists of airbagsinstalled under the pad covers in thecenter of the steering wheel and thepassenger's side front panel above theglove box.
Driver's Front Airbag
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
43
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
43
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 54/271
! WARNING:If a seat track position sensor or anoccupant classification system is notworking properly, the SRS airbag warn-ing light on the instrument panelwill illuminate because the SRS airbagwarning light is connected with the seat
track position sensor and the occupantclassification system. If the SRS airbagwarning light does not illuminate whenthe ignition key is turned to the "ON"position, remains illuminated after ap-proximately 6 seconds when the ignitionkey is turned to the "ON" position, or if itilluminates while the vehicle is being
driven, have an authorized Hyundaidealer inspect the advanced SRS airbagsystem as soon as possible.
AIRBAG
! WARNING:o Modification to the seat structure
can adversely affect the seat track position sensor and cause the airbagto deploy at a different level thanshould be provided.
o Do not place any objects underneath
the front seats as they could dam-age the seat track position sensor orinterfere with the occupant classifi-cation system.
o Do not place any objects that maycause magnetic fields near the frontseat. These may cause a malfunc-tion of the seat track position sen-
sor.
NOTE:
o Be sure to read information aboutthe SRS on the labels provided onthe topside of the sun visor.
o Advanced airbags are combined withpre-tensioner seat belts to help pro-vide enhanced occupant protectionin frontal crashes. Front airbags arenot intended to deploy in collisions in
which sufficient protection can beprovided by the pre-tensioner seatbelt.
o If you are considering modificationof your vehicle due to a disability,please contact the Hyundai Cus-tomer Assistance Center at 1-800-633-5151.
1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
44
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 55/271
! WARNING:o Move your seat as far back as prac-
tical from the front airbags, while stillmaintaining control of the vehicle.
o Never sit or lean unnecessarily closeto the front or side airbags.
o Never lean against the door or cen-
ter console – always sit in an uprightposition.o Do not allow an adult passenger to
ride in the front seat when the “Pas-senger Airbag OFF” indicator is illu-minated, because the airbag will notdeploy in the event of a moderate orsevere frontal crash.
o Never place objects over or nearany airbag module (front or side im-pact airbags), because these objectscan injure passengers in a crash.
o Never place covers, blankets oraftermarket seat warmers on thepassenger seat as these may inter-fere with the occupant classificationsystem.
! WARNING:Always use seat belts and child restraints– every trip, every time, everyone!Airbags inflate with considerable forceand in the blink of an eye. Seat belts helpkeep occupants in proper position toobtain maximum benefit from the airbag.
Even with advanced airbags, improp-erly and unbelted occupants can be se-verely injured when the airbag inflates.Always follow the precautions about seatbelts, airbags and occupant safety con-tained in this manual.
To reduce the chance of serious or fatal
injuries and receive the maximum safetybenefit from your restraint system:o Never place a child in any child or
booster seat in the front seat (seechild restraints 1-31).
o ABC – Always Buckle Children in theback seat. It is the safest place forchildren of any age to ride.
o Front and side impact airbags caninjure occupants improperly posi-tioned in the front seats.
! WARNING:o Do not tamper or disconnect SRS
wiring or other components. Injuriescould result from inadvertent deploy-ment or failure of the airbag to de-ploy in a crash.
o If the SRS airbag warning light (see
pg 1-64) remains illuminated whilethe vehicle is being driven, have anauthorized Hyundai dealer inspectthe airbag system as soon as pos-sible.
o Airbags can only be used once –have an authorized Hyundai dealerreplace the airbag immediately after
deployment.o The SRS is designed to deploy thefront airbags only when an impact issufficiently severe and when the im-pact angle is within a range as mea-sured from the forward longitudinalaxis of the vehicle. The front airbagswill not deploy in side, rear or rollover
impacts. Additionally, the airbags willonly deploy once. Seat belts must beworn at all times.
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
45
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
45
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 56/271
! WARNING:o No objects should be placed over or
near the airbag modules on the steer-ing wheel, instrument panel, and thefront passenger's panel above theglove box, because any such objectcould cause harm if the vehicle is in
a crash severe enough to cause theairbags to deploy.o If the airbags deploy, they must be
replaced by an authorized Hyundaidealer. Deployed airbags WILL NOTinflate again and will provide no pro-tection in subsequent collisions.
o Do not tamper with or disconnect
SRS wiring or other components ofthe SRS system. Doing so couldresult in injury, due to accidentaldeployment of the airbags or by ren-dering the SRS inoperative.
o Even though your vehicle is equippedwith the occupant classification sys-tem, do not install a child restraintsystem in the front passenger seatposition. A child restraint systemmust never be placed in the frontseat.
An infant or child could be severelyinjured or killed by an airbag deploy-ment in case of an accident.
o Children younger than 13 years mustalways be properly restrained in therear seat. Never allow children to
ride in the front passenger seat. If achild over 13 must be seated in thefront seat, he or she must be prop-erly belted and the seat should bemoved as far back as possible.
o For maximum safety protection in alltypes of crashes, all occupants in-cluding the driver should always wear
their seat belts whether or not anairbag is also provided at their seat-ing position to minimize the risk ofsevere injury or death in the event ofa crash. Do not sit or lean unneces-sarily close to the airbag while thevehicle is in motion.
! WARNING:! WARNING:
B240A02MC
Rear impact
Side Impact
Rollover
o Front airbags are not intended todeploy in side-impact, rear-impactor rollover crashes. In addition, frontairbags will not deploy in frontalcrashes below the deploymentthreshold.
o Move your seat as far back as prac-tical from the front airbags, while stillmaintaining control of the vehicle.You and your passengers shouldnever sit or lean unnecessarily closeto the airbags. Improperly positioneddrivers and passengers can be se-verely injured by inflating airbags.
1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
46
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 57/271
B240B02MC-AAT
SRS Components and Functions
The SRS consists of the following compo-nents:
1. Front Impact Sensor2. "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" Indicator
(Front passenger's seat only)3. SRS "AIR BAG" warning light4. Knee Bolster5. Passenger's Airbag Module6. Driver's Airbag Module7. SRS Control Module (SRSCM)8. Occupant Classification System
(Front passenger's seat only)9. Driver's and Front Passenger's Seat
Track Position Sensors (If Installed)
B240B01NF
10. Driver's and Front Passenger's Seat
Belt Buckle Sensors11. Side Impact Sensor (If Installed)12. Retractor Pre-tensioner Assemblies13. Side Impact Airbag Module (If Installed)14. Curtain Airbag Module (If Installed)
! WARNING:o Sitting improperly or out of position
can result in serious or fatal injury ina crash. All occupants should situpright with the seat back in an up-right position, centered on the seatcushion with their seat belt on, legs
comfortably extended and their feeton the floor until the vehicle is parkedand the ignition key is removed.
o The SRS airbag system must deployvery rapidly to provide protection ina crash. If an occupant is out ofposition because of not wearing aseat belt, the airbag may forcefully
contact the occupant causing seri-ous or fatal injuries.
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
47
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
47
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 58/271
The SRSCM continually monitors all ele-
ments while the ignition is "ON" to deter-mine if a frontal or near-frontal impact issevere enough to require airbag deploy-ment or pre-tensioner seat belt deploy-ment.
The SRS "AIR BAG" warning light on theinstrument panel will illuminate for about
6 seconds after the ignition key is turnedto the "ON" position or after the engine isstarted, after which the "AIR BAG" warn-ing light should go out.
B240B01L
Upon deployment, tear seams moldeddirectly into the pad covers will separateunder pressure from the expansion of theairbags. Further opening of the coversthen allows full inflation of the airbags.
The airbag modules are located both inthe center of the steering wheel and in thefront passenger's panel above the glovebox. When the SRSCM detects a suffi-ciently severe impact to the front of thevehicle, it will automatically deploy the
front airbags.
B240B02L
A fully inflated airbag, in combination witha properly worn seat belt, slows the driver'sor the passenger's forward motion, re-ducing the risk of head and chest injury.
After complete inflation, the airbag imme-diately starts deflating, enabling the driverto maintain forward visibility and the abil-ity to steer or operate other controls.
B240B03L
1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
48
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 59/271
!
Passenger's Front Airbag
B240B05L
o When installing a container of liquidair freshener inside the vehicle, donot place it near the instrument clus-ter nor on the instrument panel sur-face. If there is any leakage from theair freshener onto these areas (in-strument cluster, instrument panelor air ventilator), it may damage these
parts. If the liquid from the air fresh-ener does leak onto these areas,wash them with water immediately.
WARNING:o If an airbag deploys, there may be a
loud noise followed by a fine dustreleased in the vehicle. These con-ditions are normal and are not haz-ardous - the airbags are packed inthis fine powder. The dust generated
during airbag deployment may causeskin or eye irritation as well as ag-gravate asthma for some persons.Always wash all exposed skin areasthoroughly with lukewarm water anda mild soap after an accident in whichthe airbags were deployed.
o The SRS can function only when the
ignition key is in the "ON" position. Ifthe SRS "AIR BAG" warning lightdoes not illuminate, or continuouslyremains on after illuminating forabout 6 seconds when the ignitionkey is turned to the "ON" position, orafter the engine is started, comes onwhile driving, the SRS is not working
properly. If this occurs, have yourvehicle immediately inspected byyour Hyundai dealer.
Passenger's Front Airbag
CAUTION:o Do not install or place any accesso-
ries (drink holder, cassette holder,sticker, etc.) on the front passenger'spanel above the glove box in a ve-hicle with a passenger's airbag. Suchobjects may become dangerous pro-jectiles and cause injury if thepassenger's airbag inflates.
!
B240B01MC-A
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
49
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
49
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 60/271
!o Before you replace a fuse or discon-
nect a battery terminal, turn the igni-tion key to the "LOCK" position andremove the ignition key. Never re-move or replace the airbag relatedfuse(s) when the ignition key is in the
"ON" position. Failure to heed thiswarning will cause the SRS "AIRBAG" warning light to illuminate.
WARNING:
If the front passenger seat is occupied bya person that the system determines to beof adult size, and he/she sits properly(sitting upright with the seatback in an
upright position, centered on the seatcushion with their seat belt on, legs com-fortably extended and their feet on thefloor), the "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF"indicator will be turned off and the frontpassenger's airbag will be able to inflate,if necessary, in frontal crashes.You will find the "PASSENGER AIR BAG
OFF" indicator on the center facia panel.The following table summarizes the func-tioning of the system depending on thefront passenger seat occupant.
OMC029200N
B990A03MC-AAT
OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SYS-TEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an occu-pant classification system in the frontpassenger's seat. The Occupant Classi-fication system is designed to detect thepresence of a properly-seated front pas-senger and determine if the passenger'sfront airbag should be enabled (may in-flate) or not. The driver's front airbag isnot affected or controlled by the Occu-pant Classification System.
Main components of occupant clas-sification system
o A detection device located within thefront passenger seat cushion.
o Electronic system to determine whetherpassenger airbag systems (both frontand side) should be activated or deac-tivated.
o A warning light located on the instru-ment panel which illuminates the words"PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" indicat-ing the front passenger airbag systemis deactivated.
o The instrument panel airbag warninglight is interconnected with the occu-pant classification system.
1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
50
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 61/271
When an adult is seated in the frontpassenger seat, if the "PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF" indicator is on, turn the ignitionkey to "LOCK" and ask the passenger to
sit properly (sitting upright with the seatback in an upright position, centered onthe seat cushion with their seat belt on,legs comfortably extended and their feeton the floor). Restart the engine and havethe person remain in that position forabout 30 seconds.This will allow the system to detect the
person and to enable the passengerairbag. If the "PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF" indicator is still on, turn the ignitionkey to "LOCK" and ask the passenger tosit properly and restart the engine again.If the "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" indi-cator is still on, ask the passenger tomove to the rear seat.
Proper seating position
B990A01O
*1) The system judges a person of adultsize as an adult. When a smaller adultsits in the front passenger seat, thesystem may recognize him/her as a
child depending on his/her physiqueand posture.*2) Do not allow children to ride in the
front passenger seat. When a largerchild who has outgrown a child re-straint system sits in the front passen-ger seat, the system may recognizehim/her as an adult depending on his/
her physique or posture, or objects inthe lap of the child.*3) Never install a child restraint system
on the front passenger seat.
Condition and operation in the front pas-
senger occupant classification system
Frontpassenger
airbag
Activated
Deactivated
Deactivated
Conditiondetected by
the occupantclassification
system1. Adult* 1
2. Child* 2 orchild restraintsystem* 3
3. Unoccupied
SRSwarning
light
Off
Off
Off
"PASSEN-GER AIR
BAG OFF"indicator light
Off
On
On
Always be sure that you and all vehicle
occupants are seated and restrained prop-erly (sitting upright with the seat in anupright position, centered on the seatcushion, with the person’s legs comfort-ably extended, feet on the floor, andwearing the safety belt properly) for themost effective protection by the air bagand the safety belt.
o The OCS may not function properly ifthe passenger takes actions which candefeat the detection system. Theseinclude:(1) Failing to sit in an upright position.(2) Leaning against the door or center
console.
(3) Sitting towards the sides or the frontof the seat.(4) Putting legs on the dashboard or
resting them on other locationswhich reduce the passenger weighton the front seat.
(5) Improperly wearing the safety belt.(6) Reclining the seatback.
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 62/271
1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
52
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 63/271
! WARNING: !! WARNING:o A smaller-stature adult who is not
seated correctly (for example: seatexcessively reclined, leaning on thedoor or center console, or hips shiftedforward in the seat) can cause acondition where the advanced fron-
tal airbag system senses less weightthan if the occupant were seatedproperly (sitting upright with theseatback in an upright position, cen-tered on the seat cushion with theirseat belt on, legs comfortably ex-tended and their feet on the floor).This condition can result in an adult
potentially being misclassified andillumination of the "PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF" indicator.
B990A05O
- NEVER place feet on the dash-
board.
WARNING:o Do not allow an adult passenger to
ride in the front seat when the “PAS-SENGER AIR BAG OFF” indicator isilluminated, because the airbag willnot deploy in the event of a crash. Ifthe "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF"indicator remains illuminated afterthe passenger repositions them-selves properly and the car is re-started, Hyundai recommends thatpassenger move to the rear seatbecause the passenger's frontairbag will not deploy.
o The "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF"indicator will not change accordingto the occupants posture after thevehicle has been running for 30 sec-onds. Front seat passengers muststay properly seated to avoid seri-ous injury from a deploying airbag.For more information see page 1-49.
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
53
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
53
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 64/271
! WARNING:If the occupant classification system isnot working properly, the SRS airbagwarning light on the instrument panelwill illuminate because the passenger'sfront airbags are connected with theoccupant classification system. If thereis a malfunction of the occupant classi-fication system, the "PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF" indicator will not illuminateand the passenger's front airbags willinflate in frontal impact crashes even ifthere is no occupant in the frontpassenger's seat. If the SRS airbagwarning light does not illuminate whenthe ignition key is turned to the "ON"position, remains illuminated after ap-proximately 6 seconds when the ignitionkey is turned to the "ON" position, or if itilluminates while the vehicle is beingdriven, have an authorized Hyundaidealer inspect the occupant classifica-tion system and the SRS airbag system
as soon as possible.
NOTE:The "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" indi-cator illuminates for about 4 secondsafter the ignition key is turned to the"ON" position or after the engine isstarted. If the front passenger seat isoccupied, the occupant classificationsensor will then classify the front pas-senger within approximately 10 secondsafter the ignition is turned on.
! WARNING:o Even though your vehicle is equipped
with the occupation classificationsystem, never install a child restraintsystem in the front passenger's seat.A deploying airbag can forcefullystrike a child resulting in seriousinjuries or death. Any child under 13years of age should ride in the rearseat. Children too large for childrestraints should use the availablelap/shoulder belts. No matter whattype of crash, children of all ages aresafer when restrained in the rearseat.
o If the "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF"indicator is illuminated when the frontpassenger's seat is occupied by anadult and he/she sits properly (sit-ting upright with the seatback in anupright position, centered on the seatcushion with their seat belt on, legscomfortably extended and their feet
on the floor), have that person sit inthe rear seat.
1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
54
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 65/271
B990B02MC-AAT
Side Impact Airbag
Your Hyundai is equipped with a sideimpact airbag in each front seat. The
purpose of the airbag is to provide thevehicle's driver and/or the front passen-ger with additional protection than thatoffered by the seat belt alone. The sideimpact airbags are designed to deployonly during certain side-impact collisions,depending on the crash severity, angle,speed and point of impact. The side im-
pact airbags are not designed to deployin all side impact situations.
B990B02LZ
! WARNING:o If you change the weight on the front
passenger seat just after sit-in orrestart of the engine, the "PASSEN-GER AIR BAG OFF" indicator may beturned on or off for a few seconds,disabling or enabling the passenger
airbags. After the initial stage of about30 seconds, the "PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF" indicator will not toggle.
o Do not modify or replace the frontpassenger seat. Don't place anythingon or attach anything such as a blan-ket or after market seat heater to thefront passenger seat. This can ad-
versely affect the occupant classifi-cation system.o Do not sit on sharp objects such as
tools when occupying the front pas-senger seat. This can adversely af-fect the occupant classification sys-tem.
o Do not use accessory seat covers
on the front seats.
! WARNING:o Accident statistics show that chil-
dren are safer if they are restrainedin the rear, as opposed to the frontseat. It is recommended that childrestraints be secured in a rear seat,including an infant riding in a rear-
facing infant seat, a child riding in aforward-facing child seat and an olderchild riding in a booster seat.
o Airbags can only be used once –have an authorized Hyundai dealerreplace the airbag immediately afterdeployment.
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
55
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
55
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 66/271
WARNING:o The side impact airbag is supple-
mental to the driver's and thepassenger's seat belt systems andis not a substitute for them. There-fore your seat belts must be worn atall times while the vehicle is in mo-
tion. The airbags deploy only in cer-tain side impact conditions severeenough to cause significant injury tothe vehicle occupants.
o For best protection from the sideimpact airbag system and to avoidbeing injured by the deploying sideimpact airbag, both front seat occu-
pants should sit in an upright posi-tion with the seat belt properly fas-tened. The driver's hands should beplaced on the steering wheel at the9:00 and 3:00 positions. Thepassenger's arms and hands shouldbe placed on their laps.
o Do not use any accessory seat cov-
ers.Use of seat covers could reduce orprevent the effectiveness of the sys-tem.
!
B990B01MC
Side impact sensor
Important Safety Notes on the SideImpact Airbag System
Following are a number of safety points
concerning this system which should al-ways be observed to ensure risk of injuryis reduced in an accident.
!o Do not install any accessories on theside or near the side impact airbag.
o Do not place any objects over theairbag or between the airbag andyourself.
o Do not place any objects (an um-brella, bag, etc.) between the frontdoor and the front seat. Such objectsmay become dangerous projectilesand cause injury if the supplementalside impact airbag inflates.
o To prevent unexpected deploymentof the side impact airbag that mayresult in personal injury, avoid im-
pact to the side impact sensor whenthe ignition key is on.
WARNING:
1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
56
B990C01JM GAT
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 67/271
! WARNING:o The space between the occupant and
the curtain airbag must never beoccupied by children, passengers orpets. Occupants should never leanout or have any parts of their bodyprotruding from the window while theengine is running.
o Do not move the sun visor out tocover the side window if there is anitem attached to it such as a garagedoor remote control, pens, air fresh-eners or the like. These objects couldcause injury if the Curtain Airbag isdeployed.
o Do not install sun blinds to the reardoors, these must not obstruct orimpair the airbag in any way.
o Do not install any accessories orchildren’s toys in the Curtain Airbagdeployment zones, as this may im-pair the operation of the system orthrow parts of them into the vehiclecabin causing injury to occupants ifthe system is deployed.
B990C01JM-GAT
Curtain Airbag
Curtain airbags are located along bothsides of the roof rails above the front and
rear doors. They are designed to helpprotect the heads of the front seat occu-pants and the rear outboard seat occu-pants in certain side impact collisions.
The curtain airbags are designed to de-ploy only during certain side impact col-lisions, depending on the crash severity,
angle, speed and impact. The curtainairbags are not designed to deploy in allside impact situations, collisions from thefront or rear of the vehicle or in mostrollover situations.
B990C01MC
Curtain Airbag
! WARNING:o Before installing child restraints ,always refer to “Child Restraint Sys-tem” section to ensure correct in-stallation and that occupant protec-tion is maximized.
o Make sure that the occupant doesnot have any body parts (head, arms
& legs) protruding outside the re-straining system. An inflating airbagthat strikes an infant or child couldcause serious injury.
o Ensure the opening for the CurtainAirbag System remains unob-structed at all times, so that theairbags can inflate properly if needed.
Important Safety Notes for Curtain
Airbag SystemsFollowing are a number of safety pointsconcerning this system which should al-ways be observed to ensure risk of injuryis reduced in an accident.
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
57
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
57
B240C02NF AAT
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 68/271
B240C02NF-AAT
SRS Care
The SRS is virtually maintenance-freeand so there are no parts you can safelyservice by yourself. If the SRS "AIR BAG"warning light does not illuminate, or con-tinuously remains on, have your vehicleimmediately inspected by your Hyundaidealer.
Any work on the SRS system, such asremoving, installing, repairing, or any workon the steering wheel must be performedby a qualified Hyundai technician. Im-proper handling of the SRS system mayresult in serious personal injury.
HSM393
! WARNING:o To maintain the integrity of the Cur-
tain Airbag system, any work, re-moval or installation of the airbagand associated components (suchas roof lining and side trims) shouldonly be performed by an authorizedHyundai dealer.
WARNING:o Do not install a child restraint sys-
tem in the front passenger seat po-sition.A child restraint system must neverbe placed in the front seat. The infantor child could be severely injured byan airbag deployment in case of anaccident.
o Modification to SRS components orwiring, including the addition of anykind of badges to the pad covers ormodifications to the body structure,can adversely affect SRS perfor-mance and lead to possible injury.
o For cleaning the airbag pad covers,use only a soft, dry cloth or onewhich has been moistened with plainwater. Solvents or cleaners couldadversely affect the airbag coversand proper deployment of the sys-tem.
!
1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
58
B240D02NF-AAT
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 69/271
B240D02NF AAT
Additional Safety Precautions
o Never let passengers ride in thecargo area (trunk) or on top of afolded-down back seat. All occupantsshould sit upright, fully back in theirseats with their seat belts on and theirfeet on the floor.
o Passengers should not move out of
or change seats while the vehicle ismoving. A passenger who is not wear-ing a seat belt during a crash or emer-gency stop can be thrown against theinside of the vehicle, against otheroccupants, or out of the vehicle.
o Each seat belt is designed to re-strain one occupant. If more than one
person uses the same seat belt, theycould be seriously injured or killed ina collision.
o Do not use any accessories on seatbelts. Devices claiming to improve oc-cupant comfort or reposition the seatbelt can reduce the protection pro-vided by the seat belt and increase the
chance of serious injury in a crash.o Passengers should not place hard or
sharp objects between themselvesand the airbags. Carrying hard orsharp objects on your lap or in yourmouth can result in injuries if an airbaginflates.
! WARNING:o No objects should be placed over or
near the airbag modules on the steer-ing wheel, instrument panel, and thefront passenger's panel above theglove box, because any such objectcould cause harm if the vehicle is in
a crash severe enough to cause theairbags to inflate.o If the airbags inflate, they must be
replaced by an authorized Hyundaidealer.
o Do not tamper with or disconnectSRS wiring, or other components ofthe SRS system. Doing so could re-
sult in injury, due to accidental infla-tion of the airbags or by renderingthe SRS inoperative.
o If components of the airbag systemmust be discarded, or if the vehiclemust be scrapped, certain safetyprecautions must be observed. YourHyundai dealer knows these precau-
tions and can give you the neces-sary information. Failure to followthese precautions and procedurescould increase the risk of personalinjury.
! WARNING:o If your car was flooded and has
soaked carpeting or there is wateron the floor, do not start the engine;have the car towed to an authorizedHyundai dealer.
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
59
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
59
o Keep occupants away from the airbag Adding Equipment to or Modifying
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 70/271
! WARNING:o Sitting improperly or out of position
can cause occupants to be shiftedtoo close to a deploying airbag, strikethe interior structure or be thrownfrom the vehicle resulting in seriousinjury or death.
o Always sit upright with the seatback in an upright position, centered onthe seat cushion with your seat belton, legs comfortably extended andyour feet on the floor.
o Keep occupants away from the airbagcovers. All occupants should sit up-right, fully back in their seats with theirseat belts on and their feet on the floor.If occupants are too close to the airbagcovers, they could be injured if theairbags inflate.
o Do not attach or place objects on ornear the airbag covers. Any objectattached to or placed on the front orside impact airbag covers could inter-fere with the proper operation of theairbags.
o Do not modify the front seats. Modi-fication of the front seats could inter-fere with the operation of the supple-mental restraint system sensing com-
ponents or side impact airbags.o Do not place items under the frontseats. Placing items under the frontseats could interfere with the opera-tion of the supplemental restraint sys-tem sensing components and wiringharnesses.
o Never hold an infant or child on your
lap. The infant or child could be seri-ously injured or killed in the event of acrash. All infants and children shouldbe properly restrained in appropriatechild safety seats or seat belts in therear seat.
Adding Equipment to or Modifying
Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle.If you modify your vehicle by changingyour vehicle's frame, bumper system, frontend or side sheet metal or ride height, thismay adversely affect the operation of yourvehicle's airbag system.
1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
60 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER AND INDICATOR LIGHTS
B260A02MC-AAT
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 71/271
OMC029505N
Type A
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
61
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
61
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 72/271
1. Tachometer
2. Turn Signal Indicator Lights3. High Beam Indicator Light4. Automatic Transaxle Position Indicator Light
(If Installed)5. Odometer/Trip Odometer/Trip Computer (If Installed)6. Overdrive Off Indicator Light (Automatic transaxle only)7. Speedometer8. Check Fuel Cap Warning Light
9. Low Tire Pressure Telltale (If Installed)10. TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System) MalfunctionIndicator (If Installed)
11. Door Ajar Warning Light
12. Charging System Warning Light
13. Parking Brake/Low Brake fluid Level Warning Light14. SRS (Airbag) Warning Light15. Seat Belt Warning Light16. ECO Indicator (If Installed)17. Fuel Gauge18. Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light19. Low Oil Pressure Warning Light20. Low Fuel Warning Light21. Trunk Lid/Tail Gate Open Warning Light22. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)23. ABS Service Reminder Indicator Light (If Installed)24. Cruise Control Indicator Lights (If Installed)
1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
62
B260B02MC-AAT
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 73/271
OMC029510N
Type B
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
63
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
63
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 74/271
12. Door Ajar Warning Light13. Charging System Warning Light14. Parking Brake/Low Brake fluid Level Warning Light15. Seat Belt Warning Light16. High Beam Indicator Light17. ECO Indicator (If Installed)18. Fuel Gauge19. Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light20. Overdrive Off Indicator Light (Automatic transaxle only)
21. Low Fuel Warning Light22. Trunk Lid/Tail Gate Open Warning Light23. ABS Service Reminder Indicator Light (If Installed)24. Cruise Control Indicator Lights (If Installed)
1. Tachometer2. Turn Signal Indicator Lights3. Low Oil Pressure Warning Light4. Automatic Transaxle Position Indicator Light
(If Installed)5. Odometer/Trip Odometer6. SRS (Airbag) Warning Light7. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)8. Speedometer
9. Check Fuel Cap Warning Light10. Low Tire Pressure Telltale (If Installed)11. TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System)
Malfunction Indicator (If Installed)
1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
64 WARNING AND INDICATORLIGHTS
B260P02Y-GAT
ABS Service Reminder IndiB260C01A-AAT
O/D OFF IndicatorB260B01JM-AAT
SRS (Airbag) Warning Light
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 75/271
!
ABS Service Reminder Indi-cator (SRI) (If Installed)
When the key is turned to the "ON" posi-tion, the Anti-Lock Brake System SRI willcome on and then go off in a few seconds.If the ABS SRI remains on, comes onwhile driving, or does not come on whenthe key is turned to the "ON" position, this
indicates that there may be a problemwith the ABS.If this occurs, have your vehicle checkedby your Hyundai dealer as soon as pos-sible. The normal braking system will stillbe operational, but without the assis-tance of the anti-lock brake system.
WARNING:If both ABS SRI and Parking Brake/Brakefluid level warning lights remain "ON" orcome on while driving, there may be aproblem with E.B.D. (Electronic BrakeForce Distribution).
If this occurs, avoid sudden stops andhave your vehicle checked by yourHyundai dealer as soon as possible.
O/D OFF Indicator(Automatic Transaxle only)
When the overdrive switch is turned on,the overdrive off indicator will go out. Thisamber indicator will be illuminated whenthe overdrive switch is turned off.
B260D01A-AAT
Turn Signal IndicatorLights
The blinking green arrow on the instru-ment panel shows the direction indicatedby the turn signals. If the arrow comes onbut does not blink, blinks more rapidlythan normal, or does not blink at all, amalfunction in the turn signal system isindicated. Your dealer should be con-sulted for repairs.
B260F01A-AAT
High Beam Indicator Light
The high beam indicator light comes onwhenever the headlights are switched tothe high beam or flash position.
SRS (Airbag) Warning Light
The SRS warning light comes on forapproximately 6 seconds after the key isturned to the "ON" position or after theengine is started, after which it will go out.
This light also comes on when the SRS is
not working properly. If the AIR BAG warn-ing light does not come on, or continu-ously remains on after operating for about6 seconds when you turned the ignitionkey to the "ON" position or started theengine, or if it comes on while driving,have the SRS inspected by an authorizedHyundai dealer.
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
65
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
65
B260G01A-AAT
Low Oil Pressure WarningB260H03A-AAT
Parking Brake/D150312AUN
Automatic Transaxle Position
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 76/271
Low Oil Pressure WarningLight
CAUTION:If the oil pressure warning light stays onwhile the engine is running, serious en-gine damage may result. The oil pres-
sure warning light comes on wheneverthere is insufficient oil pressure. In nor-mal operation, it should come on whenthe ignition switch is turned on, then goout when the engine is started. If the oilpressure warning light stays on whilethe engine is running, there is a seriousmalfunction.If this happens, stop the car as soon asit is safe to do so, turn off the engine andcheck the oil level. If the oil level is low,fill the engine oil to the proper level andstart the engine again. If the light stayson with the engine running, turn the en-gine off immediately. In any instancewhere the oil light stays on when theengine is running, the engine should bechecked by a Hyundai dealer before thecar is driven again.
!
Parking Brake/ Low Brake Fluid LevelWarning Light
CAUTION:If you suspect brake trouble, have yourbrakes checked by a Hyundai dealer as
soon as possible. Driving your car witha problem in either the brake electricalsystem or brake hydraulic system isdangerous, and could result in seriousinjury or death.
!
Warning Light OperationThe parking brake/brake fluid level warn-ing light should come on when the park-ing brake is applied and the ignition switchis turned to "ON" or "START". After theengine is started, the light should go outwhen the parking brake is released.
If the parking brake is not applied, thewarning light should come on when theignition switch is turned to "ON" or"START", then go out when the enginestarts.
Automatic Transaxle PositionIndicator Light (If Installed)
The indicator displays which automatictransaxle shift position is selected.
Manual Transaxle Shift Indi-cator (If Installed)
This indicator informs you which gear isdesired while driving to save fuel.
For example:: Indicates that shifting up to the 3rd
gear is desired (currently the shiftlever is in the 2nd gear).
: Indicates that shifting down to the3rd gear is desired (currently theshift lever is in the 4th gear).
NOTE :When the system is not working prop-erly, up & down arrow indicator will blink (Gear is not displayed.).
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 77/271
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 78/271
1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
68
B260W02JM-AAT
Low Tire Pressure TelltaleD150325AMC
Cruise Indicator (If Installed)
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 79/271
! WARNING:Significantly low tire pressure makesthe vehicle unstable and can contributeto loss of vehicle control and increasedbraking distances.Continued driving on low pressure tireswill cause the tires to overheat and fail.
(If Installed)The low tire pressure telltale comes on for3 seconds after the ignition key is turnedto the "ON" position.If the warning light does not come on, orcontinuously remains on after commingon for about 3 seconds when you turned
the ignition key to the "ON" position, theTire Pressure Monitoring System is notworking properly. If this occurs, have yourvehicle checked by an authorizedHyundai dealer as soon as possible.This warning light will also illuminate oneor more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. You should stop and check your
tires as soon as possible. If the warninglight illuminates while driving, reduce ve-hicle speed immediately and stop thevehicle.Avoid hard braking and overcorrecting atthe steering wheel. Inflate the tires to theproper pressure as indicated on thevehicle’s tire information placard.
( )
CRUISE Indicator
The indicator light illuminates when thecruise control system is enabled.The cruise indicator light in the instru-ment cluster is illuminated when the cruisecontrol ON/OFF button on the steering
wheel is pushed.The indicator light turns off when thecruise control ON/OFF button is pushedagain. For more Information about theuse of cruise control, refer to page 1-103.
Cruise SET Indicator
The indicator light illuminates when thecruise function switch (-/SET or RES/+) isON.The cruise SET indicator light in the in-strument cluster is illuminated when thecruise control switch (-/SET or RES/+) ispushed. The cruise SET indicator lightdoes not illuminate when the cruise con-trol switch (CANCEL) is pushed or thesystem is disengaged.
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
69
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
69
B265W01MC-AAT
TPMS (Tire Pressure Moni-D150340AMC-EU
ECO Indicator (If Installed)B270A01A-AAT
BRAKE PAD WEAR WARNING
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 80/271
!
(toring System) MalfunctionIndicator (If Installed)
TPMS malfunction indicator comes on for3 seconds after the ignition key is turnedto the "ON" position. If the warning lightdoes not come on, or continuously re-mains on after comming on for about 3seconds when you turned the ignition keyto the "ON" position, the Tire PressureMonitoring System is not working porperly.If this occurs, have your vehicle checkedby an authorized Hyundai dealer as soonas possible.The warning light also comes on andstays on when there is a problem with theTire Pressure Monitoring System.If this happens, the system may not moni-tor the tire pressure. Have the systemchecked by an authorized Hyundai dealeras soon as possible.
WARNING:o The TPMS cannot alert you to severeand sudden tire damage caused byexternal factors.
o If you feel any vehicle instability, im-mediately take your foot off the ac-celerator, apply the brakes gradu-ally and with light force, and slowly
move to a safe position off the road.
( )
The ECO indicator is displayed to helpyou improve fuel efficiency when you aredriving.o The ECO indicator (green) will turn on
when you drive fuel efficiently in theECO ON mode. If you don't want the
indicator displayed, you can turn theECO ON mode to OFF mode by press-ing the TRIP button.
o The indicator will turn off when thesystem is not working properly in theECO ON mode.
o The fuel efficiency depends on thedriver's driving habit and road condi-
tion.o The system stops operating when the
transaxle is in the P (Park), R (Re-verse), N (Neutral) position.
ECO
! WARNING:Don't keep watching the indicator whiledriving. It will distract you and cause anaccident that results in severe personalinjury.
SOUNDThe front disc brake pads have wearindicators that should make a high-pitchedsquealing or scraping noise when newpads are needed. The sound may comeand go or be heard all the time when thevehicle is moving. It may also be heard
when the brake pedal is pushed downfirmly. Expensive rotor damage will resultif the worn pads are not replaced. Seeyour Hyundai dealer immediately.
1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
70
B330A03A-AAT
TACHOMETERB300A01A-AAT
SPEEDOMETER
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
B280A02TG-AAT
FUEL GAUGE
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 81/271
The tachometer registers the speed ofyour engine in revolutions per minute
(rpm).
CAUTION:The engine should not be increased tosuch a speed that the needle enters thered zone on the tachometer face. This
can cause severe engine damage andmay void your warranty.
!
Your Hyundai's speedometer is calibratedin miles per hour (on the outer scale) andkilometers per hour (on the inner scale).
OMC029513N
The needle on the gauge indicates theapproximate fuel level in the fuel tank.The fuel capacity is given in Section 9.
NOTE:The " " symbol means the fuel fillerlid is placed on the left side of the vehicle.
OMC029420K
Type A Type B
OMC029512N
CAUTION:Avoid driving with a very low fuel level. Ifyou run out of fuel, it could cause theengine to misfire and result in excessiveloading of the catalytic converter.
!
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
71
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
71
B310B01O-AAT
ODOMETER/TRIP ODOMETER 2. Trip Odometer Type A
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 82/271
(Without Trip Computer)
1. Odometer
The odometer records the total drivingdistance in miles, and is useful for keep-ing a record for maintenance intervals.It is normal for a new vehicle to have theodometer indicating less than 30 miles.
NOTE:
Federal law forbids alteration of the odom-eter of any vehicle with the intent tochange the number of the odometer. Thealteration may void your warranty cov-erage.
B310B01MC-A
Type A
Type B
Pushing in the trip switch for less than 1second when the ignition switch is turned"ON" displays the following sequence:
OMC029054
B310B02MC-A
B310B03MC-A
Type B
Trip odometer records the distance of 2trips in miles.
1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
72
B310C01O-AAT
ODOMETER/TRIP ODOMETERo TRIP A: Distance you have traveled
from your origination point toType B
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 83/271
(With Trip Computer)
1. Odometer
The odometer records the total drivingdistance in miles, and is useful for keep-ing a record for maintenance intervals.It is normal for a new vehicle to have theodometer indicating less than 30 miles.
NOTE:Federal law forbids alteration of the odom-eter of any vehicle with the intent tochange the number of the odometer. Thealteration may void your warranty cov-erage.
B400B03MC-E
Trip Odometer
Odometer
a first destination.o TRIP B: Distance from the first desti-
nation to the final destination.
When the trip switch is pressed for morethan 1 second, trip odometer will reset to0.
o ECO ON/OFF Mode (If Installed)
OMC029514
OMC029515
You can turn the ECO indicator on/off onthe instrument cluster in this mode.If you push the TRIP button more than 1second in the ECO ON mode, ECO OFF
is displayed and the ECO indicator ( )turns off.If you want to display the ECO indicator( ) again, press the TRIP button morethan 1 second in the ECO OFF mode andthen ECO ON mode is displayed.For more detailed explanations, refer to"Warnings and indicator lights" in section
1.
Type A
ECO
ECO
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
73
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
73
2. Trip Odometer
TRIP COMPUTER
B400B01MC-AAT
(If Installed) TRIP Switch
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 84/271
o This mode indicates the drive distancetravelled since the last drive time reset.o Refer to the explanation of the trip
computer (see page 1-74, Tripmeter).
B400B01MC-A
The trip computer is a microcomputer-controlled driver information gauge thatdisplays information related to drivingsuch as outside temperature, tripmeter,average fuel consumption and distanceto empty on the LCD.
Outside temperature
Tripmeter
Average fuel consumption
Distance to empty
ECO ON/OFF mode (if installed)
Pushing in the TRIP switch for less than1 second when the ignition switch is in"ON" position changes the display as
follows;
OMC029054
1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
74
3. Average Fuel Consumption(MPG)
2. Tripmeter (miles)1. Outside Temperature (°F)
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 85/271
( )
B400B04MC-A
o This mode calculates the average fuelconsumption from the total fuel used
and the distance since the last aver-age consumption reset.
o The total fuel used is calculated fromthe fuel consumption input.
o Average fuel consumption is reset tozero (--) if the battery is disconnected.
o To reset the average fuel consumptionto zero (--), press the TRIP switch formore than 1 second.
o When you drive 0.5 mile (0.5 km) andless after resetting, the average fuelconsumption will be displayed to '--'.
Odometer
Average Fuel Consumption
o This mode indicates the total distancetravelled since the last tripmeter reset.Total distance is also reset to zero ifthe battery is disconnected.
o Pressing the TRIP switch for more than1 second when the tripmeter is beingdisplayed clears the tripmeter to zero.
o The meter's working range is from 0 to999.9 miles (999.9 kms).
B400B03MC-E
Odometer
Tripmeter
This mode indicates the outside tem-perature between -40°F (-40°C) and176°F (80°C) .
B400B02MC-A
Odometer
Outside Temperature
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
75
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
75
4. Distance to Empty(miles)
5. ECO ON/OFF Mode (If Installed)
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 86/271
o This mode indicates the estimated dis-
tance to empty from the current fuellevel in the fuel tank.o The trip computer may not register
additional fuel if less than 1.36 gallons(6 liters) of fuel are added to the ve-hicle.
OMC049500
Distance to empty
Odometer o When the distance to empty is lessthan 30 miles (50 km), the distance toempty digits (----) will blink until morefuel is added.
NOTE:o The distance to empty can differ from
the actual tripmeter according todriving conditions.
o The distance to empty can vary ac-cording to the driving conditions, driv-ing pattern or vehicle speed.
B400B06MC-A
You can turn the ECO indicator on/off onthe instrument cluster in this mode.If you push the TRIP button more than 1
second in the ECO ON mode, ECO OFFis displayed and the ECO indicator ( )turns off.If you want to display the ECO indicator( ) again, press the TRIP button morethan 1 second in the ECO OFF mode andthen ECO ON mode is displayed.For more detailed explanations, refer to
"Warnings and indicator lights" in section1.
OMC029514
ECO
ECO
1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
76
B340C05A-AAT
Headlight SwitchB340B01A-AAT
Lane Change Signal
MULTI-FUNCTION LIGHTSWITCH
B340A01A-AAT
COMBINATION TURN SIGNAL,
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 87/271
To operate the headlights, turn the barrel onthe end of the multi-function switch. The firstposition turns on the parking lights, side-lights, tail lights and instrument panel lights.The second position turns on the headlights.
NOTE:The ignition must be in the "ON" positionto turn on the headlights.
OMC049601
To indicate a lane change, move thelever up or down to a point where itbegins flashing.The lever will automatically return to thecenter position when released.
OMC049600
HEADLIGHT AND LOW-BEAMSWITCHTurn Signal Operation
Pulling down on the lever causes the turnsignals on the left side of the car to blink.Pushing upward on the lever causes theturn signals on the right side of the car to
blink. As the turn is completed, the leverwill automatically return to the centerposition and turn off the turn signals at thesame time. If either turn signal indicatorlight blinks more rapidly than usual, goeson but does not blink, or does not go onat all, there is a malfunction in the system.Check for a burned-out fuse or bulb orsee your Hyundai dealer.
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
77
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
77
B340E01A-AAT
Headlight FlasherB340D01A-AAT
High-Beam SwitchParking Light Auto Off
Th f hi f i
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 88/271
To flash the headlights, pull the switchlever toward you, then release it. Theheadlights can be flashed even thoughthe headlight switch is in the "OFF" posi-tion.
OSA049094
o The purpose of this feature is to pre-vent the battery from being discharged.The system automatically turns off theheadlights and parking lights whenthe driver removes the ignition key andopens the driver- side door.
o With this feature, the parklight will beturned off automatically if the driver
parks on the side of road at night.If necessary, to keep the lights onwhen the ignition key is removed, per-form the following :1) Open the driver-side door.2) Turn the parking lights OFF and
ON again using the light switch onthe steering column.
To turn on the headlight high beams,push the lever forward (away from you).
The High Beam Indicator Light will comeon at the same time. For low beams, pullthe lever back toward you.
OSA049093
1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
78
B350A01MC-AAT
Windshield Wiper
WINDSHIELD WIPER/WASHER SWITCH
A : Wiper speed control· MIST – Single wipeOFF Off
Windshield wiper/washer
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 89/271
OMC048902N
(A)
(B)
(C)
The windshield wiper switch has threepositions:
A) Intermittent wiper operationB) Low-speed operationC) High-speed operation
NOTE:To prevent damage to the wiper system,do not attempt to wipe away heavy accu-mulations of snow or ice. Accumulatedsnow and ice should be removed manu-ally. If there is only a light layer of snowor ice, operate the heater in the defrostmode to melt the snow or ice beforeusing the wiper.
Rear window wiper/washer(If Installed)
· OFF – Off· INT – Intermittent wipe· LO – Low wiper speed· HI – High wiper speed
B : Intermittent wipe time adjustment
C : Wash with brief wipes
D : Rear wiper/washer control· – Wash with brief wipes· ON – Continuous wipe· OFF – Off
OSA049904
OMC048901N
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
79
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
79
B350B01A-AAT
Windshield Washer Operation Mist Wiper OperationNOTE:o Do not operate the washer more than
15 seconds at a time or when the
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 90/271
To use the windshield washer, pull thewiper/washer lever toward the steeringwheel.When the washer lever is operated, thewipers automatically make three passesacross the windshield. The washer con-tinues to operate until the lever is re-leased.
OMC048903N
OMC048904N
If a single wipe is desired in mist, movethe windshield wiper and washer controllever up.
15 seconds at a time or when thefluid reservoir is empty.o In icy or freezing weather, be sure
the wiper blades are not frozen to theglass prior to operating the wipers.
o In areas where water freezes in win-ter, use windshield washer antifreeze.
1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
80
B390A01MC-AAT
Rear Window Wiper and Washer
(If Installed)
INSTRUMENT PANEL LIGHTCONTROL (RHEOSTAT)
B410A01A-AATB350C01MC-GAT
Adjustable Intermittent Wiper Op-
eration
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 91/271
(If Installed)
1. : The washer fluid will be sprayed
onto the rear window and the wiperoperates while the rear windowwiper barrel is placed in this posi-tion.
2.ON : The rear window wiper starts tooperate continuously.
3.OFF
The instrument panel lights can be madebrighter or dimmer by turning the instru-ment panel light control knob.
B410A01MC
OSA049905
To use the intermittent wiper feature, placethe wiper switch in the "INT" position. Withthe switch in this position, the intervalbetween wipes can be varied from ap-proximately 1 to 15 seconds by turningthe interval adjuster barrel (1).
eration
OMC048905N
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
81
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
81HAZARD WARNING SYS-TEM
B370A01A-AAT
CAUTION:!
REAR WINDOW DEFROSTERSWITCH
B380A01MC-AAT
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 92/271
The hazard warning system should beused whenever you find it necessary tostop the car in a hazardous location.When you must make such an emer-
gency stop, always pull off the road as faras possible.The hazard warning lights are turned onby pushing in the hazard switch. Thiscauses all turn signal lights to blink. Thehazard warning lights will operate eventhough the key is not in the ignition.To turn the hazard warning lights off,push the switch a second time.
OMC025067
CAUTION:Do not clean the inner side of the rearwindow glass with an abrasive type ofglass cleaner or use a scraper to re-move foreign deposits from the innersurface of the glass as this may causedamage to the defroster elements.
NOTE:The engine must be running for the rearwindow defroster to operate.
!
The rear window defroster is turned on bypushing in the switch. To turn the de-froster off, push the switch a second time.The rear window defroster automaticallyturns itself off after about 20 minutes. Torestart the defroster cycle, push in theswitch again after it has turned itself off.
OMC025072
1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
82 CIGARETTE LIGHTERDIGITAL CLOCK
B420A01A-AATB400A01A-AAT
FRONT FOG LIGHT SWITCH
B360A04A-AAT
(If Installed)
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 93/271
For the cigarette lighter to work, the keymust be in the "ACC" position or the "ON"position.To use the cigarette lighter, push it all the
way into its socket. When the element hasheated, the lighter will pop out to the"ready" position.Do not hold the cigarette lighter pressedin. This can damage the heating elementand create a fire hazard.If it is necessary to replace the cigarettelighter, use only a genuine Hyundai re-placement or its approved equivalent.
HHR2098A
There are three control buttons for thedigital clock. Their functions are:
HOUR - Push "H" to advance the hourindicated.MIN - Push "M" to advance the minuteindicated.RESET - Push "R" to reset minutes to":00" to facilitate resetting the clock tothe correct time. When this is done:
Pressing "R" between 10 : 30 and 11 : 29changes the readout to 11 : 00. Pressing"R" between 11 : 30 and 12 : 29 changesthe readout to 12 : 00.
OMC029098N
To turn on the front fog lights, push theswitch. They will light when the headlightswitch is in the second position and thekey is in the "ON" position.
NOTE:If you turn on the headlight high beams,the front fog lights will be turned off.
OMC025062
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
83
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
83POWER OUTLET
B500D01MC-GAT
ASHTRAY
B430A01MC-GAT
! CAUTION:o Only use the power outlet when the
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 94/271
These supply 12V electric power to oper-ate electric accessories or equipment onlywhen the key is in the "ON" or "ACC"position.
OMC029106
To use the ashtray, open the cover. Toremove the ashtray to empty or clean it,pull it all the way out.
OMC025103
! CAUTION:o Only use the power outlet when theengine is running. Unplug the plugfrom the power outlet when the en-gine is off if the key will be left in the"ACC" or "ON" (not recommended)positions, to prevent discharging thebattery. Using when the engine stops
or leaving the electric applianceplugged in for many hours may causethe battery to discharge.
o Do not use the power outlet to con-nect electric accessories or equip-ment other than those designed tooperate on 12 volts.
o Some electronic devices can cause
electronic interference when pluggedinto the power outlet. These devicesmay cause excessive audio noiseand malfunctions in other electronicsystems or devices used in yourvehicle.
1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
84 SUNROOF
B460A02Y-AAT
(If Installed)
Sun Shade
B450B01MC-GAT
REAR DRINK HOLDER (If Installed)
DRINK HOLDER
B450A02O-AAT
FRONT DRINK HOLDER
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 95/271
!
1JBA3110
Your HYUNDAI is equipped with a slidingsunshade which you can manually adjustto let in light with the sunroof closed, or toblock sunlight.
WARNING:Never adjust the sunshade while driv-ing. This could result in loss of controland an accident that may cause death,serious injury, or property damage.
OMC025034
! WARNING:Use caution when using the drink hold-ers. A spilled beverage that is very hotcan injure your passengers. Spilled liq-
uids can damage interior trim.
The rear drink holder is located in the rearseat armrest for holding cups or cans.The rear drink holder can be used bypulling the rear seat armrest.! WARNING:
o Use caution when using the drink holders. A spilled beverage that isvery hot can injure you or your pas-sengers. Spilled liquids can damageinterior trim and electrical compo-
nents.o Do not place objects other than cupsor cans in the drink holder. Objectscan be thrown out in the event of asudden stop or an accident, possiblyinjuring the passengers in the ve-hicle.
OMC025108
The drink holder is located on the mainconsole for holding cups or cans.
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
85
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
85
B460B01MC-GAT
Opening the Sunroof System Auto slide open
To use the auto slide feature, press theSLIDE OPEN button on the overhead
B460C01TG-AAT
Tilting the Sunroof System
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 96/271
If your vehicle is equipped with this fea-ture, you can slide or tilt your sunroof withthe sunroof control buttons located on theoverhead console.The sunroof can only be opened, closed,or tilted when the ignition switch is in the"ON" position.
OMC025021
!
console for more than 1 second. Thesunroof will slide all the way open. Tostop the sunroof sliding at any point, pressany sunroof control button.
Manual slide open
Press the SLIDE OPEN button on theoverhead console for less than 0.5 sec-ond.
Manual slide close
To close the sunroof, press the TILT UPbutton on the overhead console and holdit until the sunroof is closed.
WARNING:Be careful that someone’s head, handsand body are not trapped by a closingsunroof.
Auto tilt up
To use the auto tilt feature, press the TILT
UP button on the overhead console formore than 1 second. The sunroof will tiltall the way open. To stop the sunrooftilting at any point, press any sunroofcontrol button.
Manual tilt up
Press the TILT UP button on the over-head console for less than 0.5 second.
OMC025021
1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
86
B460E02TG-GAT
Resetting the sunroof
Whenever the vehicle battery is discon-t d di h d h t t! CAUTION:o Do not open the sunroof in severely
Manual tilt down
To close the sunroof, press the SLIDEOPEN button on the overhead console
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 97/271
! CAUTION:If the sunroof is not reset, it may notoperate properly.
nected or discharged, you have to resetyour sunroof system as follows:
1. Turn the ignition key to the "ON" posi-tion.
2. Press the TILT UP button for more than1 second to tilt up the sunroof com-pletely when the sunroof is fully closed.Then, release the button.
3. Press and hold the TILT UP buttononce again until the sunroof has re-turned to the original position of TILTUP after it is raised a little higher thanthe maximum TILT UP position. Then,release the button.
4. Press and hold the TILT UP buttonwithin 5 seconds until the sunroof isoperated as follows;
TILT DOWN → SLIDE OPEN → SLIDECLOSE
Then, release the button.
! p ycold temperature or when it is cov-ered with ice or snow.
o Periodically remove any dirt that mayhave accumulated on the guide rails.
o Do not press any sunroof controlbutton longer than necessary.
Damage to the motor or system com-ponents could occur.
and hold it until the sunroof is closed.
NOTE:After washing the car or after there israin, be sure to wipe off any water that ison the sunroof before operating it.
! WARNING:o Do not close a sunroof if anyone's
hands, arms or body are betweenthe sliding glass and the sunroof
sash, as this could result in injury.o Do not place your head or arms outof the sunroof opening at any time.
o While the vehicle is moving, alwayskeep the head, hands and other partsof the body of all occupants awayfrom the roof opening. Otherwise,you could be seriously injured if the
vehicle stops suddenly or if the ve-hicle is involved in an accident.
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 98/271
1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
88 GLOVE BOX
B500A01A-AATo "ON"In the "ON" position, the light stays on at
all times.
SUNGLASS HOLDER
B491A03O-AAT
(If Installed)
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 99/271
! WARNING:To avoid the possibility of injury in case
of an accident or a sudden stop, theglove box door should be kept closedwhen the car is in motion.
B500A01MC
o To open the glove box, pull on theglove box release lever.
CAUTION:Do not leave the switch in this positionfor an extended period of time when thevehicle is not running.
!
!
The sunglass holder is located on thefront overhead console. Push the end ofthe cover to open the sunglass holder.
WARNING:o Do not keep objects except sunglass
inside the sunglass holder. Such ob-jects can be thrown from the holderin the event of a sudden stop or anaccident, possibly injuring the pas-sengers in the vehicle.
o Do not open the sunglass holder whilethe vehicle is moving. The rear viewmirror of the vehicle can be blockedby an open sunglass holder.
B491A03MC
o "OFF"In the "OFF" position, the light stays off atall times even though a door is open.
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
89
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
89MULTI BOX
B500B01MC-GAT
CAUTION:If the mirror control is jammed with ice,
!
OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIR-ROR
B510A01A-AAT
Manual Type
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 100/271
The multi box is opened by pushing theknob downward.
OMC025105
do not attempt to break it free using thecontrol handle or by manipulating theface of the mirror. Use an approvedspray de-icer (not radiator antifreeze) torelease the frozen mechanism or movethe vehicle to a warm place and allow the
ice to melt.
The outside rearview mirrors areequipped with a remote control for yourconvenience. It is operated by the control
lever in the bottom front corner of thewindow.Before driving away, always check thatyour mirrors are positioned so you cansee behind you, both to the left and rightsides, as well as directly behind yourvehicle. When using the mirror, alwaysexercise caution when attempting to judgethe distance of vehicles behind or alongside of you.
OMC025049
1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
90
B510C01A-AAT
Folding the Outside Rearview Mir-
rors
To adjust the position of either mir-ror:
1. Move the selecting switch to the rightl f h d bl h
B510B01Y-AAT
Electric Type (If Installed)
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 101/271
To fold the outside rearview mirrors, pushthem towards the rear. To unfold the out-side rear view mirrors, push them towardthe front.The outside rearview mirrors can befolded rearward for parking in restrictedareas.
OMC025051
! WARNING:Be careful when judging the size or dis-tance of any object seen in the passen-ger side rearview mirror. It is a convexmirror with a curved surface. Any ob-jects seen in this mirror are closer thanthey appear.
CAUTION:o Do not operate the switch continu-
ously for an unnecessary length oftime.
o Scraping ice from the mirror face
could cause permanent damage. Toremove any ice, use a sponge, softcloth or approved de-icer.
!
or left to activate the adjustable mecha-nism for the corresponding door mir-ror.
2. Adjust mirror angle by depressing theappropriate directional switch as illus-trated.
OMC029051
The outside rearview mirrors can be ad- justed to your preferred rear vision, bothdirectly behind the vehicle, and to the
rear of the left and right sides.The remote control outside rearview mir-ror switch controls the adjustments forboth right and left outside mirrors.
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
91
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
91PARKING BRAKEDAY/NIGHT INSIDE REAR-VIEW MIRROR
B520A01A-AAT B530A03A-AAT
!WARNING:Do not adjust or fold the outside rearview
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 102/271
Your Hyundai is equipped with a day/ night inside rearview mirror. The "night"position is selected by flipping the tab atthe bottom of the mirror toward you. In the
"night" position, the glare of headlights ofcars behind you is reduced.
OMC025047
Always engage the parking brake beforeleaving the car. This also turns on theparking brake indicator light when thekey is in the "ON" or "START" position.
Before driving away, be sure that theparking brake is fully released and theindicator light is off.
OMC035017
mirrors while the vehicle is moving. Thiscould result in loss of control, and anaccident causing death, serious injuryor property damage.
1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
92
!
HIGH-MOUNTED REARSTOP LIGHT
B550A01S-GAT
4 Door
WARNING:Whenever leaving vehicle or parkingl t th ki g b k f
Applying the parking brake
To engage the parking brake, first applythe foot brake and then without pressingthe release button in, pull the parking
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 103/271
In addition to the lower-mounted rearstop lights on either side of the car, thehigh mounted rear stop light in the centerof the rear window or inserted in the rearspoiler also lights when the brakes areapplied.
B550A01MC
B550A01MC-1
3 Door
always set the parking brake as far aspossible and fully engage the vehicle'stransaxle into the park position. Ve-hicles not fully engaged in park with theparking brake set are at risk for movinginadvertently and injuring yourself or
others.
CAUTION:Driving with the parking brake appliedwill cause excessive brake pad (or lin-ing) and brake rotor wear.
Releasing the parking brake
To release the parking brake, first applythe foot brake and pull the praking brakelever slightly. Secondly, depress the re-lease button and lower the parking brakelever while holding the button.
!
, p p gbrake lever up as far as possible. Inaddition it is recommended that whenparking the vehicle on a gradient, the shiftlever should be positioned in the appro-priate low gear on manual transaxle ve-hicles or in the P (Park) position on auto-matic transaxle vehicles.
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
93
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
93
Before closing the hood, return the sup-port rod to its clip to prevent it from rattling.
Lower the hood until it is about 1 ft. (30cm) above the closed position and let itdrop Make sure that it locks into place
HOOD RELEASE
B570A01MC-GAT
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 104/271
3. Pull the support rod from the hood.
B570A01MC
4. Hold the hood open with the supportrod.
B570A02MC
CAUTION:Make sure that the support rod has been
released prior to closing the hood.
!
drop. Make sure that it locks into place.
OMC025020
2. Pull the secondary latch lever up andlift the hood.
1. Pull the release knob to unlatch thehood.
OMC025019
! WARNING:o Always double check to be sure that
the hood is firmly latched before driv-ing away. If it is not latched, the hoodcould fly open while the vehicle isbeing driven, causing a total loss ofvisibility, which might result in anaccident.
o The support rod must be insertedcompletely into the hole provided inthe hood whenever you inspect theengine compartment. This will pre-vent the hood from falling and possi-bly injuring you.
o Do not move the vehicle with thehood in the raised position, as visionis obstructed and the hood could fallor be damaged.
1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
94 REMOTE FUEL-FILLER LIDRELEASE
NOTE:If the fuel-filler lid will not open because
ice has formed around it, tap lightly orpush on the lid to break the ice andrelease the lid Do not pry on the lid If
4 DoorB560A02MC-AAT
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 105/271
release the lid. Do not pry on the lid. Ifnecessary, spray around the lid with anapproved de-icer fluid (do not use radia-tor anti-freeze) or move the vehicle to awarm place and allow the ice to melt.
B560A02MC-1
B560A02MC
3 DoorOMC025017
The fuel-filler lid must be opened frominside the vehicle by pulling up on thefuel-filler lid opener located on the frontfloor area on the left side of the car.
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 106/271
1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
96
!WARNING:- When refueling always shut the
engine off. Sparks produced by!
TRUNK LID/TAIL GATE
B540A01MC-GAT
WARNING:The trunk lid or the tail gate should al-
Trunk Lid (4 Door)
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 107/271
engine off. Sparks produced byelectrical components related tothe engine can ignite fuel vaporscausing a fire. Always insure thatthe engine is OFF before and dur-ing refueling. Once refueling is
complete, check to make sure thefuel filler cap and door are se-curely closed, before starting theengine.
- Do not light any fire around a gasstation. DO NOT use matches or alighter and DO NOT SMOKE orleave a lit cigarette in your vehicle
while at a gas station especiallyduring refueling. Automotive fuelis highly flammable and can, whenignited, result in explosion byflames.
- If a fire breaks out during refueling,leave the vicinity of the vehicle,and immediately contact the man-
ager of the gas station or contactthe police and local fire depart-ment. Follow any safety instruc-tions they provide.
The trunk lid or the tail gate should always be kept completely closed whilethe vehicle is in motion. If it is left open orajar, poisonous exhaust gases may en-ter the car resulting in serious illiness ordeath to the occupants. See additional
warnings concerning exhaust gases onpage 2-2.
o The trunk lid is opened by first turningthe key clockwise to release the lock,then raising the door manually.
o To close, lower the trunk lid, then pressdown on it until it locks. To be sure thetrunk lid is securely fastened, try to pullit up again.
OMC025010
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
97
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
97
B540B02MC-AAT
Trunk Lid Emergency Latch Release
(4 Door)
B540D01MC-GAT
Remote Trunk Lid Release
(4 Door) (If Installed)
Tail Gate (3 Door)
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 108/271
OMC025013
Your vehicle is equipped with a glow-in-the dark emergency trunk release leverlocated inside the trunk. It will glow afterthe trunk is closed. When pulled, thislever will release the trunk latch mecha-nism and open the trunk.
! WARNING:The trunk lid should always be kept com-pletely closed while the vehicle is inmotion. If it is left open or ajar, exhaustgases may enter the car and seriousillness may result.
OMC025011
To open the trunk lid without using thekey, pull up the lid release lever.To close, lower the trunk lid, then pressdown on it until it locks. To be sure thetrunk lid is securely fastened, check bytrying to pull it up again.
o To open the tail gate, unlock it byturning the key clockwise, then pull theoutside handle toward you.
o To close, lower the tail gate and shutfirmly to engage the latch. Lock the tailgate by turning the key counterclock-wise.
o If the vehicle is equipped with centraldoor locking, the tail gate can be lockedwithout a key. Push the front portion ofthe central door locking switch afterclosing the tail gate.
o If the tail gate is open when the frontportion of the central door lockingswitch is pushed, the tail gate will belocked when it is fully closed.
OMC025010-1
1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
98
! WARNING:o If a person becomes locked in the
trunk, pull the emergency trunk re-l l f h i id l i h
! CAUTION:To prevent damage to the goods or thevehicle, care should be taken when car-
LUGGAGE NET
B540D02O-AAT
(If Installed)
Type A
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 109/271
lease lever of the inside panel in thetrunk to open the trunk lid.
o Keep cars locked and keys out of thereach of children. HYUNDAI recom-mends parents teach children aboutthe emergency trunk release leverin their vehicle and how to open thetrunk lid if they are accidentallylocked in the trunk.
rying fragile or bulky objects in the lug-gage compartment.
! WARNING:Avoid eye injury. DO NOT overstretchthe luggage net. ALWAYS keep yourface and body out of its recoil path. DONOT use when the luggage net strapshave visible signs of wear or damage.
When loading the objects in the luggagecompartment, use the four rings locatedin the luggage compartment to attach theluggage net as shown illustration. Thiswill help prevent the objects from sliding.
1JBA3113
B540D01MC
Type B
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
99
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
99SUN VISOR
B580A02MC-AAT
CARGO AREA COVER
B650A01A-GAT
(3 Door)
FLOOR MAT ANCHOR(S)
B571A03Y-AAT
(If Installed)
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 110/271
B580A01MC
Your Hyundai is equipped with sun visorsto give the driver and front passengereither frontal or sideward shade. To re-duce glare or to shut out direct rays of the
sun, turn the sun visor down.
Nothing should be carried on top of theluggage cover. Loose materials couldresult in injury to vehicle occupants dur-
ing sudden braking.
B650A01MC
When using a floor mat on the front floorcarpet, make sure it attaches to the floormat anchor(s) in your vehicle. This keeps
the floor mat from sliding forward.
OMC040174
! WARNING:o Make sure the floor mat is properly
placed on the floor carpet. If the floormat slips and interferes with the move-
ment of the pedals during driving, itmay cause an accident.o Don't put an additional floor mat on
the top of the anchored floor mat,otherwise the additional mat mayslide forward and interfere with themovement of the pedals.
1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
100
!WARNING:o Do not place the sun visor in such a
manner that it obscures visibility of
B500B01B-GAT
Illuminated Vanity Mirror(If Installed)
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 111/271
the roadway, traffic or other objects.o Do not move the sun visor out to
cover the side window if there is anitem attended to it such as a garagedoor remote control, pens, air fresh-
eners or the like. These objects couldcause injury if the curtain airbag isdeployed.
Opening the lid of the vanity mirror willautomatically turn on the mirror light.
OMC025100
Ticket holders and vanity mirrors are pro-vided on the back of the sun visor for thedriver and the front passenger (If Installed).
NOTE:
The Supplemental Restraint System(SRS) label containing useful informa-tion can be found on the topside of sunvisor.
B580A02MC
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
101
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
101
B580C01JM-AAT
Sun Visor Extender (If Installed)
STEERING WHEEL TILTLEVER
B600A01A-AAT
(If Installed)
HORN
B610B01L-GAT
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 112/271
Your vehicle is equipped with sun visorextenders that may be used when thevisor is in the side glass position.
B580C01MC
!
To Adjust the Steering Wheel:1. Push the lever downward to unlock.2. Raise or lower the steering wheel to
the desired position.3. After adjustment, securely tighten the
lever by pulling it upward.
WARNING:Do not attempt to adjust the steeringwheel while driving as this may result inloss of control of the vehicle which maycause serious injury or death.
OMC025045 Press the pad on the steering wheel tosound the horn.
OMC025046
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 113/271
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
103
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
103
!WARNING:o Pay particular attention to the driv-
ing conditions whenever using thecruise control system
E090100AMC
To set cruise control speed:
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM
E090000AMC
(If Installed)
The cruise control system allows you toprogram the vehicle to maintain a con-stant speed without resting your foot onh l d l
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 114/271
cruise control system.o Be careful when driving downhill
using the cruise control system,which may increase the vehiclespeed.
! CAUTION:During cruise-speed driving of a manualtransaxle vehicle, do not shift into neu-tral without depressing the clutch pedal,since the engine will be overrevved. Ifthis happens, depress the clutch pedalor release the cruise control ON/OFFswitch.
NOTE:During normal cruise control operation,when the -/SET switch is activated orreactivated after applying the brakes,the cruise control will energize after ap-proximately 3 seconds. This delay isnormal.
1. Push the CRUISE ON-OFF button onthe steering wheel to turn the systemon. The CRUISE indicator light in the
instrument cluster will illuminate.2. Accelerate to the desired speed, which
must be more than 25 mph (40 km/h).
OMC039300
the accelerator pedal.This system is designed to function aboveapproximately 25 mph (40 km/h).
! WARNING:o If the cruise control is left on,
(CRUISE indicator light in the instru-ment cluster illuminated) the cruisecontrol can be switched on acciden-tally. Keep the cruise control sys-tem off (CRUISE indicator light OFF)when the cruise control is not in use,to avoid inadvertently setting aspeed.
o Use the cruise control system onlywhen traveling on open highways ingood weather.
o Do not use the cruise control when itmay not be safe to keep the car at aconstant speed, for instance, drivingin heavy or varying traffic, or onslippery (rainy, icy or snow-covered)or winding roads or over 6% up-hillor down-hill roads.
1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
104
E090200AMC
To increase cruise control set speed:NOTE:On steeper hills, with a Manual Transaxle,the cruise control may be unable to main-tain the set speed. The driver shoulddownshift as necessary. Press the"RES/+" button to resume the cruise
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 115/271
Follow either of these procedures:o Push the RES/+ switch and hold it.
Your vehicle will accelerate. Release
the switch at the speed you want.o Push the RES/+ switch and release it
immediately. The cruising speed willincrease by 1 mph (1.6 km/h) eachtime the RES/+ switch is operated inthis manner.
OMC039302
control at the set speed in the new gear.After cresting the hill, upshift, and pressthe "RES/+" again. If the speed drops ~9 mph below the set speed, the cruisecontrol will cancel. If it cancels, shift tothe appropriate gear, and press the"RES/+" to resume the cruse control.OMC039301
3. Push the -/SET switch, and release it atthe desired speed. The SET indicatorlight in the instrument cluster will illu-minate. Release the accelerator at thesame time. The desired speed will
automatically be maintained.On a steep grade, the vehicle may slowdown or speed up slightly while goingdownhill.
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
105
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
105
E090500AMC
To cancel cruise control, do one ofthe following:
E090400AUN
To temporarily accelerate with thecruise control on:
If you want to speed up temporarily whenthe cruise control is on, depress the ac-
l t d l I d d ill t
E090300AMC
To decrease the cruising speed:
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 116/271
o Press the brake pedal.o Press the clutch pedal with a manual
transaxle.o Shift into N (Neutral) with an automatic
transaxle.o Press the CANCEL switch located on
the steering wheel.o Decrease the vehicle speed lower than
the memory speed by 9 mph (15 km/h).o Decrease the vehicle speed to less
than approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).
OMC039303
celerator pedal. Increased speed will notinterfere with cruise control operation orchange the set speed.To return to the set speed, take your footoff the accelerator.
Follow either of these procedures:o Push the -/SET switch and hold it. Your
vehicle will gradually slow down. Re-
lease the switch at the speed you wantto maintain.o Push the -/SET switch and release it
immediately. The cruising speed willdecrease by 1 mph (1.6 km/h) eachtime the -/SET switch is operated inthis manner.
OMC039301
1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
106
E090600AMC
To resume cruising speed at morethan approximately 25 mph (40 km/h):
Each of these actions will cancel cruisecontrol operation (the SET indicator lightin the instrument cluster will go off), but itwill not turn the system off. If you wish toresume cruise control operation, pushthe RES/+ switch located on your steer-
E090700AUN
To turn cruise control off, do one ofthe following:
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 117/271
If any method other than the CRUISE ON-OFF switch was used to cancel cruisingspeed and the system is still activated,the most recent set speed will automati-cally resume when the RES/+ switch ispushed. It will not resume, however, if thevehicle speed has dropped below ap-proximately 25 mph (40 km/h).
OMC039302
o Push the CRUISE ON-OFF button (theCRUISE indicator light in the instru-
ment cluster will go off).o Turn the ignition off.Both of these actions cancel cruise con-trol operation. If you want to resume cruisecontrol operation, repeat the steps pro-vided in “To set cruise control speed” onthe previous page.
ying wheel. You will return to your previ-ously preset speed.
OMC039300
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
107
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
107AUX, USB AND iPod ® PORT
D281400AFD
(If Installed)
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 118/271
If your vehicle has an aux and/orUSB(universal serial bus) port or iPodport, you can use an aux port to connect
audio devices, a USB port to plug in aUSB, and an iPod port to plug in an iPod.When using an iPod through the vehicle'sAudio System, a Hyundai adapter cableis required in order to receive all func-tions, which can be purchased at yourlocal Hyundai dealership.
NOTE:When using a portable audio device con-nected to the power outlet, noise mayoccur during playback. If this happens,use the power source of the portableaudio device.
❈ iPod ® is a trademark of Apple Inc.
OMC029033C
1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
108 HEATING AND COOLING CONTROL
B710A01TB-GAT
(If Installed)B710B01MC-AAT
Center Ventilator/Side Ventilator
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 119/271
1. Side Defroster Nozzle
2. Side Ventilator3. Windshield Defroster Nozzle4. Center Ventilator B710A01MC
B710B01MC
The center ventilators are located in themiddle of the dashboard. The side venti-lators are located on each side of dash-
board. To change the direction of the airflow, move the knob in the center of thevent up-and-down and side-to-side.The vents are opened when the ventknob is moved to " " position. Thevents are closed when the vent knob ismoved to " ". Keep these vents clear ofany obstructions.
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
109
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
109
B670B01A-AAT
Fan Speed Control(Blower Control)
B670C03A-AAT
Air Intake Control
HEATING AND VENTILA-TION
B670A02A-GAT
(If Installed)
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 120/271
1. Temperature control2. Air conditioning switch (If Installed)3. Air intake control switch
4. Air flow control5. Fan speed control
This is used to turn the blower fan on oroff and to select the fan speed.This blower fan speed, and therefore thevolume of air delivered from the system,may be controlled manually by setting theblower control between the "1" and "4"positions.
B670A01MC-D
OMC025083
B670C02MC
This is used to select fresh outside air orrecirculating inside air.
FreshRecirculation
With the " " mode selected, air entersthe vehicle from outside and is heated orcooled according to the other functionsselected.With the " " mode selected, air fromwithin the passenger compartment isdrawn through the heating system andheated or cooled according to the otherfunctions selected.
1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
110
NOTE:It should be noted that prolonged opera-tion of the intake air system in " "mode will give rise to misting of thewindshield and side windows and the airwithin the passenger compartment willbecomestale Inadditionprolongeduse
B670D03MC-AAT
Air Flow Control
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 121/271
become stale. In addition prolonged useof the air conditioning with the " "mode selected may result in the air withinthe passenger compartment becomingexcessively dry.
This is used to direct the flow of air. Aircan be directed to the floor, instrumentpanel outlets, or windshield. Five sym-bols are used to represent Face, Bi-Level, Floor, Floor-Defrost and Defrost airposition.
B670D01MC-D Face-Level
Selecting the "Face" mode will cause airto be discharged through the face level
vents.
B670D02MC
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
111
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
111
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 122/271
Bi-Level
Air is discharged through the face ventsand the floor vents.
Floor-Level
Air is discharged through the floor vents,windshield defroster nozzle, side defrosternozzle and side ventilator.
Floor-Defrost Level
Air is discharged through the windshielddefroster nozzle, the floor vents, sidedefroster nozzle and side ventilator.In vehicle equipped with A/C, the A/C willautomatically be turned on and "Fresh"mode will be activated.
B670D03MC B670D04MC B670D05MC
1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
112
NOTE:In vehicle equipped with A/C, when "Floor-Defrost" or "Defrost" modes are se-lected, the A/C will automatically beturned on and "Fresh" mode will be ac-tivated to help dry the air.The A/C will not turn off and "Recircula-
B670E02A-AAT
Temperature Control
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 123/271
Defrost-Level
Air is discharged through the windshielddefroster nozzle, side defroster nozzle,
side ventilator.In vehicle equipped with A/C, the A/C willautomatically be turned on and "Fresh'mode will be activated.
B670D06MC
The A/C will not turn off and Recircula-tion" mode will not be selected until theair flow control is set to the another modeother than the "Floor-Defrost" and the"Defrost" mode.
This control is used to adjust the degreeof heating or cooling desired.
Cool WarmB670E01MC
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
113
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
113BI-LEVEL HEATING
B700A02A-AAT
VENTILATION
B710A01A-AAT
HEATING CONTROLS
B690A02A-AAT
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 124/271
Your Hyundai is equipped with bi-levelheating controls. This makes it possibleto have cooler air from the dashboardvents and warmer air from the floor out-lets at the same time. To use this feature:
o Set the air intake control to the fresh air( ) position.
o Set the air flow control at the bi-level( ) position.
o Adjust the fan speed control to thedesired speed.
o Set the temperature control between"Cool" and "Warm".
B700B01MC-D
To operate the ventilation system:
o Set the air intake control to "Fresh"mode ( ).
o To direct all intake air to the dashboardvents, set the air flow control to the ( )position.
o Adjust the fan speed control to thedesired speed.
o Set the temperature control between"Cool" and "Warm".
B710A01MC-D
For normal heating operation, set the airintake control to the fresh air ( ) positionand the air flow control to the floor ( )position.For faster heating, the air intake controlshould be set in the recirculate ( )position.If the windows fog up, set the air flowcontrol to the defrost ( ) position (TheA/C will automatically be turned on and"Fresh" mode will be activated.).For maximum heat, move the tempera-
ture control to "Warm".
B690A01MC-D
1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
114 DEFROSTING/DEFOGGING
B720A01MC-AAT NOTE:When the A/C is operated continuouslyon the floor-defrost level ( ) or defrostlevel ( ), it may cause fog to form onthe exterior windshield. If this occurs,set the air flow control to the face levelposition ( ) and fan speed control to the
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 125/271
Use the heating/ventilation system todefrost or defog the windshield:
To remove interior fog on the wind-
shield:o Set the air flow control to the defrost
( ) position (The A/C will automati-cally be turned on and "Fresh" modewill be activated.).
o Set the temperature control to the de-sired position.
o Set the fan speed control between "1"and "4" position.
B720A01MC-D
low position.
To remove the frost or exterior fogon the windshield:
o Set the air flow control to the defrost( ) position (The A/C will automati-cally be turned on and "Fresh" modewill be activated.).
o Set the temperature control to warm.o Set the fan speed control to position
"3" or "4".
B720A02MC-D
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 126/271
1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
116
B740D01A-AAT
Operation Tips
o If the interior of the car is hot when youfirst get in, open the windows for a fewminutes to expel the hot air.
o When you are using the air condition-ing system, keep all windows closed to
B740C01MC-AAT
De-Humidified Heating
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 127/271
ing system, keep all windows closed tokeep hot air out.
o When moving slowly, as in heavy traf-fic, shift to a lower gear.
This increases engine speed, which inturn increases the speed of the airconditioning compressor.
o On steep grades, turn the air condi-tioning off to avoid the possibility of theengine overheating.
o During winter months or in periodswhen the air conditioning is not used
regularly, run the air conditioning onceevery month for a few minutes.This will help circulate the lubricantsand keep your system in peak operat-ing condition.
For dehumidified heating:
o Turn on the fan control switch.o Push the air conditioning switch. The
air conditioning indicator light shouldcome on at the same time.
o Set the air intake control switch to thefresh air ( ) position.
o Adjust the fan control to the desiredspeed.
o For more rapid action, set the fan at
one of the higher speeds.o Adjust the temperature control to pro-vide the desired amount of warmth.
B740C01MC-D
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
117
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
117
B720A01MC-AAT
DEFROSTING/DEFOGGING
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 128/271
Use the heating/ventilation system to defrost or defog thewindshield:
To remove interior fog on the windshield;
o Set the air flow control to the defrost ( ) position (TheA/C will automatically be turned on and "Fresh" mode willbe activated.).
o Set the temperature control to the desired position.o Set the fan speed control between "1" and "4" position.
To remove frost or exterior fog on the windshield;o Set the air flow control to the defrost ( ) position (The
A/C will automatically be turned on and "Fresh" mode willbe activated.).
o Set the temperature control to warm.o Set the fan speed control to position "3" or "4".
NOTE:When the A/C is operated continuously on the floor-defrost level ( ) or defrost level ( ), it may cause fog to formon the exterior windshield. If this occurs, set the air flow control to the face level position ( ) and fan speed controlto the low position.
OMC029102 OMC029103
1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
118
!CAUTION:
o Replace the filter every 10,000 miles(15,000 km) or once a year. If the caris being driven in severe conditionssuch as dusty, rough roads, more
CLIMATE CONTROL AIRFILTER
Outside air
B760A07A-AAT
(For evaporator and blow unit)
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 129/271
frequent climate control air filter in-spections and changes are required.
o When the air flow rate is decreased,
the system should be checked at anauthorized dealer.
B760A01MC
Inside ofa vehicle
Evaporator core FilterBlower
Inside air
The climate control air filter is located infront of the evaporator unit behind theglove box.
It operates to decrease the amount ofpollutants entering the car.To replace the climate control air filter,refer to the page 6-16.
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
119
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
119STEREO SOUND SYSTEM
B750A02A-AAT
How Car Audio Works FM radio station
FM reception
AM reception
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 130/271
¢ ¢ ¢ ¢ ¢ ¢¢ ¢ ¢
FM broadcasts are transmitted at highfrequencies and do not bend to follow theearth's surface. Because of this, FM broad-casts generally begin to fade at shortdistances from the station. Also, FM sig-
nals are easily affected by buildings,mountains, or other obstructions. Thesecan result in certain listening conditionswhich might lead you to believe a prob-lem exists with your radio. The followingconditions are normal and do not indicateradio trouble:
AM broadcasts can be received at greaterdistances than FM broadcasts. This isbecause AM radio waves are transmittedat low frequencies. These long, low fre-quency radio waves can follow the curva-
ture of the earth rather than travellingstraight out into the atmosphere. In addi-tion, they curve around obstructions sothat they can provide better signal cover-age.
AM and FM radio signals are broadcastfrom transmitter towers located aroundyour city. They are intercepted by theradio antenna on your car. This signal isthen received by the radio and sent toyour car speakers.When a strong radio signal has reachedyour vehicle, the precise engineering ofyour audio system ensures the best pos-sible quality reproduction. However, insome cases the signal coming to your
vehicle may not be strong and clear.This can be due to factors such as thedistance from the radio station, close-ness of other strong radio stations or thepresence of buildings, bridges or otherlarge obstructions in the area.
JBM002 JBM003
JBM001
1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
120
¢ ¢ ¢
Satellite radio receptionYou may experience problems in receiv-ing XMTM satellite radio signals in thefollowing situations.
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 131/271
o Station Swapping - As an FM signalweakens, another more powerful sig-nal near the same frequency may be-gin to play. This is because your radiois designed to lock onto the clearest
signal. If this occurs, select anotherstation with a stronger signal.o Multi-Path Cancellation - Radio sig-
nals being received from several di-rections can cause distortion or flutter-ing. This can be caused by a direct andreflected signal from the same station,or by signals from two stations with
close frequencies. If this occurs, selectanother station until the condition haspassed.
o Fading - As your car moves away fromthe radio station, the signal willweaken and sound will begin to fade.When this occurs, we suggest that youselect another stronger station.
o Flutter/Static - Weak FM signals orlarge obstructions between the trans-mitter and your radio can disturb thesignal causing static or fluttering noisesto occur. Reducing the treble levelmay lessen this effect until the distur-bance clears.
JBM004
• If you are driving in a tunnel or acovered parking area.
• If you are driving beneath the top levelof a multi-level freeway.
• If you drive under a bridge.• If you are driving next to a tall
vechicle(such as a truck or a bus) thatblock the signal.
• If you are driving in a valley where thesurrounding hills or peaks block thesignal from the satellite.
• If you are driving on a mountain roadwhere is blocked by mountains.
JBM005
SATELITE1
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
121
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
121
B750B05Y-AAT
Using a cellular phone or a two-wayradio
When a cellular phone is used inside thevehicle, noise may be produced from theaudio equipment. This does not meanthat something is wrong with the audio
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 132/271
!
equipment. In such a case, use the cellu-lar phone at a place as far as possiblefrom the audio equipment.
WARNING:Hyundai recommends that you neveruse a cell phone while driving. This couldresult in loss of control, and an accidentthat may cause death, serious injury, orproperty damage. You must stop at asafe place to use a cellular phone.
NOTE:Some states and cities have regulationsprohibiting the use of cell phones whiledriving. You should be aware of the spe-
cific requirements in your area.
• If you are driving in an area with talltrees that block the signal(10m ormore), for example on an road thatgoes through a dense forset.
• The signal can become weak in some
areas that are not covered by the re-peater station network.
Please note that these may be otherunforeseen circumstances when there areproblems with the reception of XM TM sat-ellite radio signal.
SATELITE2
1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
122 CARE OF DISCS
Storage
When not in use, place your discs in their
individual cases and store them in a coolplace away from the sun, heat, and dust.Do not grip or pull out the disc with yourhand while the disc is being pulled intothe unit by the self loading mechanism.
B850A02F-AAT
Proper Handling
ANTENNA
B870D02MC-AAT
MICRO ANTENNA
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 133/271
Keep Your Discs Clean
Handle your disc as shown. Do not dropthe disc. Hold the disc so you will notleave fingerprints on the surface. If the
surface is scratched, it may cause thepickup to skip signal tracks. Do not affixtape, paper, or gummed labels on thedisc. Do not write on the disc.
Damaged Disc
Do not attempt to play damaged, warped
or cracked discs. These could severelydamage the playback mechanism.
Fingerprints, dust, or soil on the surface ofa disc could cause the pickup to skipsignal tracks. Wipe the surface clean with
a clean soft cloth.If the surface is heavily soiled, dampen aclean soft cloth in a solution of mild neu-tral detergent to wipe it clean.
B850A01L
B850A02L
Your car uses the micro antenna to re-ceive AM, FM and Satellite Radio broad-cast signals. This antenna is removable.
OMC025111-1
CAUTION:o Before entering an automatic car
wash, remove by turning the antennacounterclockwise to prevent dam-age to the micro antenna. To installthe antenna, turn the antenna clock-wise.
o Be sure to remove the micro an-tenna before entering a garage witha low height or installing a car cover.
!
1
123
123
DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI 1AUDIO SYSTEM
1. AM Selection Button2. FM Selection Button
PA710A01MC-AAT
RADIO, SET UP, VOLUME CONTROL (PA710) (If Installed)
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 134/271
2. FM Selection Button3. Automatic Channel Selection Button4. Power ON/OFF & Volume Control
Button5. SCAN Button6. MUTE Button7. SETUP Button8. TUNE/ENTER Button9. PRESET Button
A-200MCUA
1
125
125
DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI 1
PA710C01MC-AAT
CD (PA710) (If Installed)
1. CD Loading Slot2. CD Indicator
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 135/271
2. CD Indicator3. CD Eject Button4. CD Selection Button5. AUX Selection Button6. Automatic Track Selection Button7. Information Display Button8. TUNE/ENTER Button9. RANDOM Play Button10. REPEAT Button11. SCAN Play Button12. FOLDER Button
A-200MCUA
1
127
127
DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI 1
11. SCAN Play ButtonPlays first 10 seconds of each song in theDISC. To cancel the mode, press the keyonce again.
12. FOLDER ButtonFolder up/down operation.o Folder is moved up or down from cur
NOTE:o To assure Proper operation of the
unit, keep the vehicle interior tem-perature within a nomal range byusing the vehicle’s air conditioningor heating system.
o When replacing the fuse, replace itwith a fuse having the correct capac-
! CAUTION:o Do not insert warped or poor quality
discs into the CD player as damageto the unit may occur.
o Do not insert anything like coins intothe player slot as damage to the unit
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 136/271
o Folder is moved up or down from cur-rently playing and folder name be-comes displayed.
o Press enter key to play theselectedfolder.o If the enter key is not pressed with in 5
seconds, then the previous folder namewill be displayed again.
ity.o All stored bookmarks are all erased
when the car battery is disconnectedor power to the vehocle is lost. if thisoccurs, the bookmarks will have tobe reset.
o This equipment is designed to beused only in a 12 volt DC batterysystem with negative ground.
o This unit is made of precision parts.Do not attempt to disassemble oradjust any parts.
o when driving your vehicle, be sure tokeep the volume of the unit set lowenough to allow you to hear soundscoming from the outside.
o Do not expose this equipment (in-cluding the speakers and CD) to wateror excessive moisture.
may occur.o Do not place beverages close to the
audio system. The playback mecha-nism may be damaged if you spillthem.
o Do not strike or allow anything toimpact the audio system, damage tothe system mechanisms could oc-cur.
o Off-road or rough sunface drivingmay cause the compact disc to skip.Do not use the compact disc whendriving in such conditions as dam-age to the compact disc face couldoccur.
o Do not attempt to grab or pull thecompact disc out while the disc isbeing pulled into the audio unit by theself-loading mechanism. Damage tothe audio unit and compact disc couldoccur.
1
129
129
DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI 1
PA710SB01MC-AAT
1. AUX/USB Selection ButtonIf the auxiliary device is connected, it
turns to AUX or USB mode to play thesound from the auxiliary player. If there isno auxiliary device, then it displays themessage "No Media" for 3 seconds andreturns to the previous mode.
3. RANDOM Playback ButtonPress the button for less than 0.8 secondto start or stop the random playback of thesongs in the current folder.Press the button for more than 0.8 secondto randomly play the entire songs in theUSB device.Press the button again to cancel the
7. FOLDER Moving Buttono Press [FOLDER ] button to move to
child folder of the current folder anddisplay the first song in the folder.Press TUNE/ ENTER knob to move tothe folder displayed. It will play the firstsong in the folder.
o Press [FOLDER ] button to move to
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 137/271
2. TRACK Moving Buttono Press the [TRACK ] button for less
than 0.8 second to play from the begin-ning of the song currently played.Press the button for less than 0.8 sec-ond and press it again within 1 sec-onds to move to and play the previoustrack.Press the button for 0.8 second orlonger to play the song in reversedirection in fast speed.
o Press the [TRACK ] button for lessthan 0.8 second to move to the nexttrack. Press the button for 0.8 secondor longer to play the song in forwarddirection in fast speed.
mode.
4. REPEAT Selection ButtonPress the button for less than 0.8 secondto repeat the song currently played.Press the button for more than 0.8 secondto repeat the entire songs in the USBdevice.
5. SCAN Selection ButtonScans each song in the USB device for10 seconds each.Press the button once again to cancelscanning.
6. INFO ButtonDisplays the information of the file cur-
rently played in the order of FILE NAME➟ TITLE ➟ ARTIST ➟ ALBUM ➟ FOLDER➟ TOTAL FILE ➟ NORMAL DISPLAY ➟
FILE NAME ➟ … (Displays no informa-tion if the file has no song information.)
parent folder display the first song inthe folder.Press TUNE/ENTER knob to move tothe folder displayed.
8. SEARCH Knob & ENTER ButtonTurn this button clockwise to display thesongs ahead of the currently played song.Turn the button counterclockwise to dis-play the songs before the currently played
song.o Press the button to skip to and play theselected song.
o Pressing the button changes the BASS,MIDDLE, TREBLE, FADER and BAL-ANCE TUNE mode. The mode selectedis shown on the display. After selectingeach mode, rotate the Audio control
knob clockwise or counterclockwise.
1
131
131
DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI 1
PA710SC01MC-AAT
RUNNING iPod ® (PA710) (If Installed)
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 138/271
1. iPod Selection Button2. TRACK Moving Button3. RANDOM Playback Button4. REPEAT Selection Button5. INFO Button6. SEARCH Knob & ENTER Button7. CATEGORY Selection Button
iPod ® is a trademark of Apple Inc.
A-200MCUA
1
133
133
DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI 1
! CAUTION:o You need the power cable exclusivefor an iPod in order to operate an
iPod with the buttons on the audiosystem. The PC cable provided byApple may cause a malfunction anddo not use it for vehicle use
NOTE:o Some iPod models might not support
the communication protocol and thefiles will not be played. (iPod modelssupported: Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano,5G)
o The order of search or playback ofsongs in the iPod can be differentf h d h d i h di
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 139/271
do not use it for vehicle use.o When connecting the device with an
iPod cable, push in the jack fully not
to interfere with communication.o When adjusting the sound effects of
an iPod and the audio system, thesound effects of both devices willoverlap and might reduce or distortthe quality of the sound.
o Deactivate (turn off) the equalizerfunction of an iPod when adjustingthe audio system’s volume, and turnoff the equalizer of the audio systemwhen using the equalizer of an iPod.
o When the iPod cable is connected,the system can be switched to theAUX mode even without the iPoddevice and can cause noise. Discon-nect the iPod cable when you are notusing the iPod device.
o When the iPod is not used for theaudio system, the iPod cable has tobe separate from iPod devices. Origi-nal display of iPod may not be dis-played.
from the order searched in the audiosystem.
o If the iPod crashes due to its ownmalfunction, reset the iPod. (Reset:Refer to iPod manual)
o An iPod may not operate normally onlow battery.
1
135
135
DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI 1
1. AM Selection ButtonPressing the [AM] button selects the AMband. AM Mode is displayed on the LCD.
2. FM Selection ButtonTurns to FM mode and toggles FM1 andFM2 when the button is pressed eachtime.
5. Power ON/OFF & Volume ControlButton
Turns on/off the set when the IGNITIONSWITCH is on ACC or ON. If the button isturned to the right, it increases the volumeand left, decreases the volume.
6. SCAN Button
8. SETUP ButtonPress this button to turn to the SCROLL,XM option, RETURN and P.BASS adjust-ment mode.If no action is taken for 5 seconds afterpressing the button, it will return to theplay mode.(After entering SETUP mode,move between items using the left, right
d PUSH f ti f th TUNE b tt )
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 140/271
3. XM Selection ButtonTurns to FM mode, and toggles in theorder of XM1 ➟ XM2➟ XM3➟ ···➟ XM1···when the button is pressed time.
4. Automatic Channel SelectionButton
o When the [SEEK ] button is pressed,
it reduces the band frequency by200khz to automatically select chan-nel. Stops at the previous frequency ifno channel is found.
o When the [SEEK ] button is pressed,it increases the band frequency by50khz to automatically select channel.Stops at the previous frequency if no
channel is found.
If this button is pressed, the frequencieswill become increased and receive the
corresponding broadcasts.This function will play the frequencies for10 seconds each and find other broad-casts as the frequency increases.Press the button again when desiring tocontinue listening to the currently playingbroadcast.
7. MUTE ButtonPress to temporarily cut off the Sound.
and PUSH functions of the TUNE button.)The setup Items changes from SCROLL<->XM<->RETURN<->P.BASS.
9.Infomation Display Button
Informatiom is Display Function opetion(Information is displayed each time (the)ey is pressed)Pressing the Title ➟ Artist ➟ Album Cat-
egory ➟ Channel ➟ Title-KEY for 3 sec-onds will display the corresponding textthen become restored.
Text Scroll operationAfter pressing (the) Key, if the text to bedisplayed is longer than the LCD text line,then rotating the TUNE Knob will operatethe page up function displaying 8 charac-ters for 3 seconds each-displayes themaximum lines of text supported by XM.
1
137
137
DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI 1
PA710SC01MC-AAT
CD (PA710S) (If Installed)
1. CD Loading Slot
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 141/271
1. CD Loading Slot2. CD Indicator3. CD Eject Button
4. CD/AUX Selection Button5. Automatic Track Selection Button6. Information Display Button7. TUNE/ENTER Button8. RANDOM Play Button9. REPEAT Button10. SCAN Play Button11. FOLDER Button
A-200MCUA
1
139
139
DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI 1
10. SCAN Play ButtonScans each song in the USB device for10 seconds each. To cancel the mode,press the button once again.
11. FOLDER ButtonFolder up/down operation.o Folder is moved up or down from
NOTE:o To assure Proper operation of the
unit, keep the vehicle tnterior tem-
perature within a nomal range byusing the vehicle’s air conditioningor heating system.
o When replacing the fuse, replace itwith a fuse having the correct capac-ity.
! CAUTION:o Do not insert warped or poor quality
discs into the CD player as damageto the unit may occur.
o Do not insert anything like coins intothe player slot as damage to the unitmay occur
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 142/271
currently playing and folder name be-comes displayed.
o Press en te r key to play theselectedfolder.o If the enter key is not pressed with in
5 seconds, then the previous foldername will be displayed again.
ity.o All stored bookmarks are all erased
when the car battery is disconnectedor power to the vehocle is lost. if thisoccurs, the bookmarks will have tobe reset.
o This equipment is designed to beused only in a 12 volt DC batterysystem with negative ground.
o This unit is made of precision parts.Do not attempt to dosassemble oradjust any parts.
o when driving your vehicle, be sureto keep the volume of the unit set lowenough to allow you to hear soundscoming from the outside.
o Do not expose this equipment (in-cluding the speakers and CD) to wateror excessive moisture.
may occur.o Do not place beverages close to the
audio system. The playback mecha-nism may be damaged if you spillthem.
o Do not strike or allow anything toimpact the audio system, damage tothe system mechanisms could oc-cur.
o Off-road or rough sunface drivingmay cause the compact disc to skip.Do not use the compact disc whendriving in such conditions as dam-age to the compact disc face couldoccur.
o Do not attempt to grab or pull thecompact disc out while the disc isbeing pulled into the audio unit by theself-loading mechanism. Damage tothe audio unit and compact disc couldoccur.
1
141
141
DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI 1
1. CD/AUX Selection ButtonIf USB is connected, it switches to theUSB mode fron the other mode to play thesong file stored in the USB. if no CD andauxiliary device is not connected, it dis-plays “NO Media” for 3 seconds and re-turns to the previous mode.
2 TRACK Moving Button
3. RANDOM Playback ButtonPress the button for less than 0.8 secondto start or stop the random playback of thesongs in the current folder.Press the button for more than 0.8 secondto randomly play the entire songs in theUSB device.Press the button again to cancel themode.
7. FOLDER Moving Buttono Press [FOLDER ] button to move to
child folder of the current folder anddisplay the first song in the folder.Press TUNE/ ENTER knob to move tothe folder displayed. It will play the firstsong in the folder.
o Press [FOLDER ] button to move toparent folder display the first song in
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 143/271
2. TRACK Moving Buttono Press the [TRACK ] button for less
than 0.8 second to play from the begin-ning of the song currently played.Press the button for less than 0.8 sec-ond and press it again within 1 sec-onds to move to and play the previoustrack.Press the button for 0.8 second orlonger to play the song in reverse
direction in fast speed.o Press the [TRACK ] button for lessthan 0.8 second to move to the nexttrack. Press the button for 0.8 secondor longer to play the song in forwarddirection in fast speed.
mode.
4. REPEAT ButtonPress the button for less than 0.8 secondto repeat the song currently played.Press the button for more than 0.8 secondto repeat the entire songs in the USBdevice.
5. SCAN Selection ButtonPress the button for less than 0.8 secondto repeat the button for more than 0.8second to repeat the entire songs in theUSB device.
6. INFO ButtonDisplays the information of the file cur-
rently played in the order of FILE NAME➟ TITLE ➟ ARTIST ➟ ALBUM ➟ FOLDER➟ TOTAL FILE ➟ NORMAL DISPLAY ➟
FILE NAME ➟ … (Displays no informa-tion if the file has no song information.)
parent folder display the first song inthe folder.Press TUNE/ENTER knob to move tothe folder displayed.
8. SEARCH Knob & ENTER ButtonTurn this button clockwise to display thesongs ahead of the currently played song.Turn the button counterclockwise to dis-play the songs before the currently played
song.o Press the button to skip to and play theselected song.
o Pressing the button changes the BASS,MIDDLE, TREBLE, FADER and BAL-ANCE TUNE mode. The mode se-lected is shown on the display. Afterselecting each mode, rotate the Audio
control knob clockwise or counterclock-wise.
1
143
143
DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI 1
PA710SC01MC-AAT
RUNNING iPod ® (PA710S) (If Installed)
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 144/271
1. iPod Selection Button2. TRACK Moving Button3. RANDOM Playback Button4. REPEAT Selection Button5. INFO Button6. SEARCH Knob & ENTER Button7. CATEGORY Selection Button
iPod ® is a trademark of Apple Inc.
A-200MCUA
1
145
145
DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI 1
NOTE:o Some iPod models might not support
the communication protocol and the
files will not be played. (iPod modelssupported: Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano,5G)
o The order of search or playback ofsongs in the iPod can be differentfrom the order searched in the audio
! CAUTION:o You need the power cable exclusivefor an iPod in order to operate an
iPod with the buttons on the audiosystem. The PC cable provided byApple may cause a malfunction anddo not use it for vehicle use.
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 145/271
system.o If the iPod crashes due to its own
malfunction, reset the iPod. (Reset:Refer to iPod manual)
o An iPod may not operate normally onlow battery.
o When connecting the device with aniPod cable, push in the jack fully not
to interfere with communication.o When adjusting the sound effects ofan iPod and the audio system, thesound effects of both devices willoverlap and might reduce or distortthe quality of the sound.
o Deactivate (turn off) the equalizerfunction of an iPod when adjustingthe audio system’s volume, and turnoff the equalizer of the audio systemwhen using the equalizer of an iPod.
o When the iPod cable is connected,the system can be switched to theAUX mode even without the iPoddevice and can cause noise. Discon-nect the iPod cable when you are notusing the iPod device.
o When the iPod is not used for theaudio system, the iPod cable has tobe separate from iPod devices. Origi-nal display of iPod may not be dis-played.
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 146/271
2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
2
! WARNING: ENGINE EXHAUST CAN BE DANGEROUS!C010A03A-AATEngine exhaust fumes can be extremely dangerous. If, at any time, you smell exhaust fumes inside the vehicle, open thewindows immediately.o Do not inhale exhaust fumes.Exhaust fumes contain carbon monoxide, a colorless, odorless gas that can cause unconsciousness and death byasphyxiation.
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 147/271
o Be sure the exhaust system does not leak.
The exhaust system should be checked whenever the vehicle is raised to change the oil or for any other purpose. If you heara change in the sound of the exhaust or if you drive over something that strikes the underneath side of the car, have the exhaustsystem checked as soon as possible by your Hyundai dealer.o Do not run the engine in an enclosed area.Letting the engine idle in your garage, even with the garage door open, is a hazardous practice. Never run the engine in yourgarage any longer than it takes to start the engine and back the car out.o Avoid idling the engine for prolonged periods with people inside the car.
If it is necessary to idle the engine for a prolonged period with people inside the car, be sure to do so only in an open areawith the air intake set at "Fresh" and fan operating at one of the higher speeds so fresh air is drawn into the interior.If you must drive with the trunk lid/ tail gate open because you are carrying objects that make this necessary:1. Close all windows.2. Open side vents.3. Set the air intake control at "Fresh", the air flow control at "Floor" or "Face" and the fan at one of the higher speeds.To assure proper operation of the ventilation system, be sure the ventilation air intakes located just in front of the windshieldare kept clear of snow, ice, leaves or other obstructions.
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 148/271
2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
4
C040A02A-AAT
KEY POSITIONS
LOCK
ACC
ON
START
NOTE:Do not hold the key in the "START"position for more than 15 seconds.
o "ON"
When the key is in the "ON" position, theignition is on and all accessories may beturned on. If the engine is not running, thekey should not be left in the "ON" position.
TO START THE ENGINE
C030A01A-AAT
COMBINATION IGNITION SWITCH
o If your Hyundai is equipped with amanual transaxle, place the shift leverin neutral and depress the clutch pedalfully.
o If your Hyundai has an automatictransaxle, place the shift lever in "P"(park).
h i i h i i i
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 149/271
WARNING:The engine should not be turned off orthe key removed from the ignition key
cylinder while the vehicle is in motion.The steering wheel is locked by remov-ing the key.
o "START"
The engine is started in this position. Itwill crank until you release the key.
!
C040A01E-1
START y pThis will discharge the battery and may
also damage the ignition system.o "ACC"
With the key in the "ACC" position, someelectrical accessories (radio, etc.) may beoperated.
o "LOCK"
The key can be removed or inserted inthis position. To protect against theft, thesteering wheel locks by removing thekey.
NOTE:If difficulty is experienced turning theignition switch to the ACC position, turnthe key while turning the steering wheelright and left to release the tension.
o To start the engine, insert the ignitionkey and turn it to the "START" position.Release it as soon as the engine starts.Do not hold the key in the "START"position for more than 15 seconds.
NOTE:o For safety, the engine will not start if
the clutch pedal is not depressedfully (Manual Transaxle) or the shiftlever is not in "P" or "N" Position(Automatic Transaxle).
o The ignition key cannot be turnedfrom "ACC" position to "LOCK" po-sition unless the shift lever is in the"P" (Park) position or the negativebattery terminal is disconnectedfrom the battery. (For AutomaticTransaxle)
5
DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI 2
C070C01A-AAT
To Remove the Ignition Key
LOCK
ACC
ON
STARTING
C050A01A-AAT
LOCK ON
C050B02A-AAT
Normal Conditions:
The Starting Procedure:
1. Insert key, and fasten the seat belt.2. Depress the clutch pedal fully and
place the gearshift lever (manualtransaxle) in neutral or the selectorlever (automatic transaxle) in "P" (park)
iti
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 150/271
1. Turn the ignition key to the "ACC"position.
2. Simultaneously push and turn the igni-tion key counterclockwise from the"ACC" position to the "LOCK" position.
3. The key can be removed in the "LOCK"position.
C070C01E-1
START
WARNING:Never run the engine in a closed orpoorly ventilated area any longer thanis needed to move your car in or out ofthe area. The carbon monoxide gasemitted is odorless and can cause se-rious injury or death.
C050A01E-1
!
START position.3. After turning the ignition key to the
"ON" position, make certain all warn-ing lights and gauges are functioningproperly before starting the engine.
WARNING:Be sure that the clutch is fully de-pressed when starting a manualtransaxle vehicle. Your manualtransaxle equipped vehicle will notstart unless the clutch pedal is fullydepressed. On a manual transaxleequipped vehicle that can be startedwithout depressing the clutch,there is the potential to cause damageto the vehicle or injury to someoneinside or outside the vehicle as a resultof the forward or backward movementof the vehicle that will occur if the clutchis not depressed when the vehicle isstarted.
!
2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
6
NOTE:o To shift into reverse, rest the lever
in neutral for at least 3 seconds after
your car is completely stopped. Thenmove the lever into the reverse po-sition.
o During cold weather, shifting may bedifficult until the transaxle lubricanthas warmed up. This is normal andnot harmful to the transaxle.
OPERATING THE MANUALTRANSAXLE
C070A01MC-GAT4. Turn the ignition key to the "Start" po-sition and release it when the enginestarts.
After the engine has started, allow theengine to run for 10 to 20 secondsprior to placing the vehicle in gear.The starter should not be operated formore than 15 seconds at a time. Wait15-30 seconds between starting at-tempts to protect the starter from over-
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 151/271
!
o If you've come to a complete stop
and it's hard to shift into 1st
orR(Reverse), put the shift lever inN(Neutral) position and release theclutch. Press the clutch pedal back down, and then shift into 1 st orR(Reverse) gear position.
o Do not use the shift lever as ahandrest during driving, as this can
result in premature wear of thetransaxle shift forks.
Your Hyundai's manual transaxle hasfive forward gears and one reverse gear.This shift pattern is also imprinted on theshift knob. The transaxle is fully synchro-nized in all forward gears so shifting to
either a higher or a lower gear is easilyaccomplished.When shifting into reverse gear, pull themis-shift prevention tab and shift into re-verse gear position.
OMC035013
tempts to protect the starter from overheating.
WARNING:Always fully depress the brake pedalbefore and while shifting out of the "P"Park position into another position toavoid inadvertent motion of the vehiclewhich could injure persons in or aroundthe car.
7
DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI 2
! CAUTION:
o Do not downshift more than 2 gearsor downshift the gear when the en-gine is running at high speed (5,000RPM or higher). Such downshiftingmay damage the engine.
o When downshifting from fifth gear tofourth gear, caution should be taken
C070E03A-AAT
RECOMMENDED SHIFT POINTSC070B01A-AAT
Using the Clutch
The clutch should be pressed all the wayto the floor before shifting, then releasedslowly. Do not rest your foot on the clutchpedal while driving. This can cause un-necessary wear.Do not partially engage the clutch to holdthe car on an incline. This causes unnec-essary wear Use the parking brake to
Shift
from-to
Recommended
mph(km/h)
15 (20)
25 (40)
35 (55)
1-2
2-3
3-4
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 152/271
g ,not to inadvertently press the gear
shift lever sideways in such a man-ner that second gear is engaged.Such a drastic downshift may causethe engine speed to increase to thepoint that the tachometer will enterthe red zone. Such over revving ofthe engine may possibly cause en-gine damage.
The shift points as shown above arerecommended for optimum fuel economyand performance.
essary wear. Use the parking brake tohold the car on an incline. Do not operatethe clutch pedal rapidly and repeatedly.
( )
45 (75)4-5
2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
8
!o Exercise extreme caution when driv-
ing on a slippery surface. Be espe-cially careful when braking, accelerat-
ing or shifting gears. On a slipperysurface, an abrupt change in vehiclespeed can cause the drive wheels tolose traction and the vehicle to go outof control.
WARNING:
o Always buckle-up! In a collision, anunbelted occupant is significantlymore likely to be seriously injured orkilled than a properly belted occu-pant.
o Avoid high speeds when corneringor turning.
C070D03O-AAT
Good Driving Practices
o Never take the car out of gear andcoast down a hill. This is extremelyhazardous. Always leave the car ingear.
o Don't "ride" the brakes. This can causethem to overheat and malfunction. In-stead, when you are driving down along hill slow down and shift to a lower
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 153/271
o Do not make quick steering wheel
movements, such as sharp lanechanges or fast, sharp turns.o The risk of rollover is greatly in-
creased if you lose control of yourvehicle at highway speeds.
o Loss of control often occurs if two ormore wheels drop off the roadwayand the driver oversteers to reenter
the roadway.o In the event your vehicle leaves theroadway, do not steer sharply. In-stead, slow down before pulling back into the travel lanes.
o Never exceed posted speed limits.
long hill, slow down and shift to a lowergear. When you do this, engine brak-ing will help slow the car.
o Slow down before shifting to a lowergear. This will help avoid over-revvingthe engine, which can cause damage.
o Slow down when you encounter crosswinds. This gives you much bettercontrol of your car.
o Be sure the car is completely stoppedbefore you attempt to shift into reverse.The transaxle can be damaged if youdo not. To shift into reverse, depressthe clutch, move the shift lever to neu-tral, wait three seconds, then shift tothe reverse position.
9
DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI 2AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE
C090A01A-AAT NOTE:Depress the brake pedal and pushthe button when shifting
Push the button when shiftingThe selector lever can be shiftedfreely.
For optimum fuel economy, accelerategradually. The transaxle will automati-
C090B02A-AAT
The function of each position is asfollows:
o P (Park):
Use to hold the vehicle in place whenparking or while starting the engine.Whenever parking the car, apply the park-ing brake and shift the selector lever tothe "P" (Park) position
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 154/271
The highly efficient Hyundai automatictransaxle has four forward speeds andone reverse speed. It has a conventionalshift pattern as shown in the illustration.
OMC035014
CAUTION:Never shift into "R" or "P" positionwhile the car is moving.
!
cally shift to the second, third and over-
drive gears.
the "P" (Park) position.
CAUTION:Never place the selector lever in the"P" (Park) position unless the vehicle isfully stopped. Failure to observe thiscaution will cause severe damage tothe transaxle.
!
2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
10
C090H01A-AAT
NOTE:o For smooth and safe operation, de-
press the brake pedal when shiftingfrom "Neutral" position or "Park"position to a forward or reverse gear.
o The ignition key must be in the "ON"position and the brake pedal fullydepressed in order to move the shiftlever from the "P" (Park) position toany of the other positions
C090F01A-AAT
o 2 (Second gear):
Use for driving on a slippery road, hill
climbing or engine braking downhill. "2"automatically shifts between first andsecond gears.This means that no shift-up to 3rd gear isperformed. However, the shift-up to thirdgear is done when the car speed ex-ceeds a certain value to prevent the en-
C090C01A-AAT
o R(Reverse):
Use for backing up the vehicle. Bring the
car to a complete stop before shifting theselector lever to "R" position.
C090D02A-AAT
o N (Neutral):
In the "N" position the transaxle is in
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 155/271
any of the other positions.
o It is always possible to shift from"R", "N", "D", "2", "L" position to "P"position.
C090G01A-AAT
o L (Low gear):
Use for driving up a very steep grade or
for engine braking when descendingsteep hills. When downshifting to "L", thetransaxle will temporarily remain in sec-ond gear until the vehicle has slowedenough for low gear to engage. Do notexceed 31 mph (50 km/h) in low gear.
pgine from over-revving.Manually move the selector to "D" return-ing to normal driving condition.
In the N position, the transaxle is inneutral position, which means that nogears are engaged. The engine can bestarted with the shift lever in "N" position,although this is not recommended exceptif the engine stalls while the car is mov-ing.
C090E02A-AAT
o D (Drive):Use for normal driving. Bring the car to acomplete stop before shifting the selectorto "D" position. The transaxle will auto-matically shift through a four-gear se-quence. Never downshift manually to "2"position or "L" position when vehicle
speed is more than 60 mph (96 km/h).
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 156/271
2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
12
WARNING:
o Always buckle-up! In a collision, anunbelted occupant is significantlymore likely to be seriously injured orkilled than a properly belted occu-pant.
o Avoid high speeds when corneringor turning.
o Do not make q ick steering heel
!o Exercise extreme caution when driv-
ing on a slippery surface. Be espe-cially careful when braking, accelerat-
ing or shifting gears. On a slipperysurface, an abrupt change in vehiclespeed can cause the drive wheels tolose traction and the vehicle to go outof control.
o Optimum vehicle performance andeconomy is obtained by smoothly de-pressing and releasing the accelera
C090N07A-AAT
Good Driving Practices
o Never move the gear selector lever
from "P" or "N" to any other positionwith the accelerator pedal depressed.
o Never move the gear selector leverinto "P" when the vehicle is in motion.
o Be sure the car is completely stoppedbefore you attempt to shift into "R" or"D".
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 157/271
o Do not make quick steering wheel
movements, such as sharp lanechanges or fast, sharp turns.o The risk of rollover is greatly in-
creased if you lose control of yourvehicle at highway speeds.
o Loss of control often occurs if two ormore wheels drop off the roadwayand the driver oversteers to reenter
the roadway.o In the event your vehicle leaves theroadway, do not steer sharply. In-stead, slow down before pulling back into the travel lanes.
o Never exceed posted speed limits.
pressing and releasing the accelera-
tor pedal.o Turn the overdrive switch on for goodfuel economy and smooth driving. Ifengine braking is needed in the "D"range or if repeated upshifting anddownshifting between the 3rd and 4thgear is needed when climbing a gentleslope, it is recommended that the over-
drive switch be turned off. Turn theoverdrive switch back on immediatelyafterward.
o Never take the car out of gear andcoast down a hill. This may be ex-tremely hazardous. Always leave thecar in gear when moving.
o Do not "ride" the brakes. This cancause them to overheat and malfunc-tion. Instead, when you are drivingdown a long hill, slow down and shiftto a lower gear. When you do this,engine braking will help slow the car.
o Slow down before shifting to a lowergear. Otherwise, the lower gear maynot be engaged.
o Always use the parking brake. Do notdepend on placing the transaxle in "P"to keep the car from moving.
13
DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI 2
!o If your vehicle becomes stuck insnow, mud, sand, etc., then you may
attempt to rock the vehicle free bymoving it forward and backward. Donot attempt this procedure if peopleor objects are anywhere near thevehicle. During the rocking opera-tion the vehicle may suddenly move
WARNING: ! WARNING:
ABS will not prevent accidents due toimproper or dangerous driving maneu-vers. Even though vehicle control isimproved during emergency braking,always maintain a safe distance be-tween you and objects ahead. Vehiclespeeds should always be reduced dur-ing extreme road conditions
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYS-TEM
C120A01MC-AAT
(If Installed)
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) is
designed to prevent wheel lock-up dur-ing sudden braking or on hazardous roadsurfaces. The ABS control module moni-tors the wheel speed and controls thepressure applied to each brake. Thus, inemergency situations or on slick roads,ABS will increase vehicle control duringb ki
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 158/271
tion the vehicle may suddenly move
forward of backward as it becomesunstuck, causing injury to nearbypeople or damage to objects.
ing extreme road conditions.
The braking distance for cars equippedwith an anti-lock braking system maybe longer than for those without it in thefollowing road conditions.During these conditions the veicleshould be driven at reduced speeds.
o Rough, gravel or snow-covered
roads.o With tire chains installed.o On roads where the road surface is
pitted or has different surface height.
These roads should be driven at re-duced speeds. The safety features ofan ABS equipped vehicle should not betested by high speed driving or corner-ing. This could endanger the safety ofyourself or others.
braking.
NOTE:o A click sound may be heard in the
engine compartment when the ve-hicle begins to move after the engineis started. These conditions are nor-mal and indicate that the anti-lock brake system is functioning prop-erly.
o During ABS operation, a slight pulsa-tion may be felt in the brake pedalwhen the brakes are applied. Also, anoise may be heard in the enginecompartment while braking. Theseconditions are normal and indicatethat the anti-lock brake system isfunctioning properly.
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 159/271
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 160/271
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 161/271
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 162/271
2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
18
C160K01A-AAT
Carry Emergency Equipment
Depending on the severity of the weather
where you drive your car, you shouldcarry appropriate emergency equipment.Some of the items you may want to carryinclude tire chains, tow straps or chains,flashlight, emergency flares, sand, ashovel, jumper cables, a window scraper,gloves, ground cloth, coveralls, a blanket,etc.
C160G01A-AAT
To Keep Locks from Freezing
To keep the locks from freezing, squirt an
approved de-icer fluid or glycerine intothe key opening. If a lock is covered withice, squirt it with an approved de-icingfluid to remove the ice. If the lock is frozeninternally, you may be able to thaw it outby using a heated key. Handle the heatedkey with care to avoid injury.
C160I01A-AAT
Don't Let Your Parking Brake Freeze
Under some conditions your parking brake
can freeze in the engaged position. Thisis most likely to happen when there is anaccumulation of snow or ice around ornear the rear brakes or if the brakes arewet. If you think the parking brake mayfreeze, apply it only temporarily whileyou put the gear selector lever in "P"(automatic) or in first or reverse gear
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 163/271
C160H01A-AAT
Use Approved Anti-Freeze in Win-dow Washer System
To keep the water in the window washersystem from freezing, add an approvedanti-freeze solution in accordance withinstructions on the container. Windowwasher anti-freeze is available fromHyundai dealers and most auto partsoutlets. Do not use engine coolant orother types of anti-freeze as these maydamage the finish.
( ) g
(manual transaxle) and block the rearwheels so the car cannot roll. Then re-lease the parking brake.
C160J01A-AAT
Don't Let Ice and Snow AccumulateUnderneath
Under some conditions, snow and icecan build up under the fenders and inter-fere with the steering. When driving insevere winter conditions where this mayhappen, you should periodically checkunderneath the car to be sure the move-ment of the front wheels and the steeringcomponents is not obstructed.
19
DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI 2
!
USE OF LIGHTS
C180A01A-AAT
Check your lights regularly for correctoperation and always keep them clean.
When driving during the day in conditionsof poor visibility, it is helpful to drive withheadlights on low beam. This enablesyou to be seen, as well as to see.
HIGHER SPEED MOTORING
C170A02A-AAT
Pre-Trip Inspections
1. Tires:
Adjust the tire inflation pressures for high-way driving. Low tire inflation pressureswill result in overheating and possiblefailure of the tires.Avoid using worn or damaged tires whichmay result in reduced traction or tire fail-ure.
o Driving on tires with no or insuffi-cient tread is dangerous. Worn-outtires can result in loss of vehiclecontrol, collisions, injury, and evendeath. Worn-out tires should be re-placed as soon as possible andshould never be used for driving.Always check tire tread before driv-
WARNING:
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 164/271
!
NOTE:Never exceed the maximum tire infla-tion pressure shown on the tires.
WARNING:o Underinflated or overinflated tires
can cause poor handling, loss of ve-hicle control, and sudden tire failureleading to accidents, injuries, andeven death. Always check tires areproperly inflated before driving. Referto pages 2-20 and 8-3 for proper tirepressures and further information.
2. Fuel, engine coolant and engine oil:High speed travel consumes more fuelthan urban motoring. Do not forget tocheck both engine coolant and engine
oil.3. Drive belt:A loose or damaged drive belt may resultin overheating of the engine.
ing your car. Refer to 8-12 for furtherinformation and tread limits.
2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
20 TRAILER TOWING
C190A01A-AAT
VEHICLE LOAD LIMIT
C190F01MC-AAT
Tire and Loading Information LabelType A
Type C
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 165/271
Your Hyundai should not be used to towa trailer. It is designed to be compact andlight for good fuel economy, and is notdesigned as a trailer-towing vehicle.Damages or malfunctions caused by tow-ing may not be covered by the limitedwarranties applying to your Hyundai.Damages or malfunctions that result fromtowing a trailer for commercial purposesare specifically not covered by Hyundailimited warranties.
C190A01MC
OMC040405
OMC040406
Type B
OMC040407
OMC040408
Type D
21
DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI 2
Steps For Determining Correct LoadLimit -1. Locate the statement "The com-
bined weight of occupants and cargoshould never exceed XXX kg orXXX lbs.'' on your vehicle's placard.
2. Determine the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers that willbe riding in your vehicle.
The tire label located on the driver'sside of the center pillar outer panelgives the original tire size, cold tirepressures recommended for your ve-hicle, the number of people that can bein your vehicle and vehicle capacityweight.
Vehicle capacity weight:849 lbs (385 kg)
However the seating capacity may bereduced based upon the weight of allof the occupants, and the weight of thecargo being carried or towed. Do notoverload the vehicle as there is a limitto the total weight, or load limit includ-ing occupants and cargo, the vehiclecan carry.
Towingcapacity:
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 166/271
3. Subtract the combined weight of thedriver and passengers from XXX kgor XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the avail-able amount of cargo and luggageload capacity. For example, if the"XXX" amount equals 1400 lbs. and
there will be five 150 lb passengersin your vehicle, the amount of avail-able cargo and luggage load capac-ity is 650 lbs.(1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)
5. Determine the combined weight ofluggage and cargo being loaded onthe vehicle. That weight may notsafely exceed the available cargoand luggage load capacity calcu-lated in Step 4.
849 lbs (385 kg)Vehicle capacity weight is the maxi-mum combined weight of occupantsand cargo.
Seating capacity:Total: 5 persons
(Front seat: 2 persons,Rear seat: 3 persons)
Seating capacity is the maximum num-ber of occupants including a driver,your vehicle may carry.
Towing capacity:We do not recommend using this ve-hicle for trailer towing.
Cargo capacity:The cargo capacity of your vehicle willincrease or decrease depending on the
weight and the number of occupants.
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 167/271
23
DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI 2
C190G03JM-AAT
Compliance LabelRefer to your vehicle’s tire and loadinginformation label for specific informa-tion about your vehicle’s capacityweight and seating positions. The com-bined weight of the driver, passengersand cargo should never exceed yourvehicle’s capacity weight.
Example 3
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 168/271
The compliance label is located on thedriver's side of the center pillar outerpanel.
The label shows the maximum allow-able weight of the fully loaded vehicle.This is called the GVWR (Gross Ve-hicle Weight Rating). The GVWR in-cludes the weight of the vehicle, alloccupants, fuel and cargo.
C190G01AC190F03JM
Total
1400 lbs
(635 kg)
860 lbs
(390 kg)
540 lbs
(245 kg)
Item
A
B
C
Description
Vehicle Capacity Weight
Subtract Occupant Weight
172 lbs (78 kg) x 5
Available Cargo Weight
A B C
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 169/271
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 170/271
If the Engine Will Not Start ........................................... 3-2Jump Starting................................................................ 3-3If the Engine Overheats ............................................... 3-4Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ................... 3-5Spare Tire ................................................................... 3-10
WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY
3
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 171/271
If You Have a Flat Tire ............................................... 3-11Changing a Flat Tire ................................................... 3-11If Your Vehicle Must Be Towed ................................. 3-16Emergency Towing ..................................................... 3-18If You Lose Your Keys ............................................... 3-20 3
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 172/271
3WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY
3JUMP STARTING
D010D01A-AAT
If the Engine Stalls While Driving
1. Reduce your speed gradually, keep-
ing a straight line. Move cautiously offthe road to a safe place.2. Turn on your emergency flashers.3. Try to start the engine again. If your
vehicle will not start, contact a Hyundaidealer or seek other qualified assis-tance.
D020A02A-AAT o If you should accidentally get acid onyour skin or in your eyes, immediatelyremove any contaminated clothingand flush the area with clear water forat least 15 minutes. Then promptlyobtain medical attention. If you mustbe transported to an emergency facil-ity, continue to apply water to the af-fected area with a sponge or cloth.
o The gas produced by the battery dur-ing the jump-start operation is highlyexplosive. Do not smoke or allow a
k fl i h i i i
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 173/271
! WARNING:The gas produced by the battery duringthe jump-start operation is highly ex-plosive. If these instructions are notfollowed exactly, serious personal in-jury and damage to the vehicle mayoccur! If you are not sure how to followthis procedure, seek qualified assis-tance. Automobile batteries contain sul-furic acid. This is poisonous and highlycorrosive. When jump starting, wearprotective glasses and be careful not toget acid on yourself, your clothing or onthe car.
D020A02MCspark or open flame in the vicinity.
o The battery being used to provide the jump start must be 12-volt. If you can-not determine that it is a 12-volt bat-tery, do not attempt to use it for the
jump start.o To jump start a car with a discharged
battery, follow this procedure exactly:
1. If the booster battery is installed inanother vehicle, be sure the two ve-hicles are not touching.
2. Turn off all unnecessary lights andaccessories in both vehicles.
F020100AUN-EU
If the Engine Stalls at a Crossroad orCrossing
If the engine stalls at a crossroad orcrossing, set the shift lever in theN(Neutral) position and then push thevehicle to a safe place.
34
WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY
IF THE ENGINE OVERHEATS
D030A02A-AAT
If your temperature gauge indicates over-heating, you experience a loss of power,or hear loud pinging or knocking, theengine is probably too hot. If this hap-pens, you should:
1. Pull off the road and stop as soon asit is safe to do so.
2. Place the gear selector lever in "P"(automatic), or neutral (manual
transaxle) and set the parking brake Ifh i di i i i ff
3. Attach the clamps of the jumper cablein the exact location shown on theprevious page. First, attach one clampof the jumper cable to the positive (+)post or cable of the discharged battery.Then attach the other end of the samecable to the positive (+) post or cableof the booster battery. Next, using theother cable, attach one clamp to thenegative (-) post or cable of the boosterbattery. Then attach the other end ofthat cable to a solid metal part of theengine away from the battery Do not
If you do not know why your battery be-came discharged (because the lights wereleft on, etc.), have the charging systemchecked by your Hyundai dealer.
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 174/271
transaxle) and set the parking brake. Ifthe air conditioner is on, turn it off.3. If coolant is running out under the car
or steam is coming out from under-neath the hood, stop the engine. Donot open the hood until the coolanthas stopped running or the steaminghas stopped. If there is no visible loss
of coolant and no steam, leave theengine running and check to be surethe engine cooling fan is operating. Ifthe fan is not running, turn the engineoff.
4. Check to see if the water pump drivebelt is missing. If it is not missing,check to see that it is tight. If the drive
belt seems to be satisfactory, check forcoolant leaking from the radiator, hosesor under the car. (If the air conditionerhad been in use, it is normal for coldwater to be draining from it when youstop).
engine away from the battery. Do notconnect the cable to any moving part.
4. Start the engine in the car with thebooster battery and let it run for a fewminutes. This will help to assure thatthe booster battery is fully charged.During the jumping operation, run theengine in this vehicle at about 2000rpm.
5. Start the engine in the car with thedischarged battery using the normalstarting procedure. After the enginestarts, leave the jumper cables con-nected and let the engine run at fastidle or about 2000 rpm for several
minutes.6. Carefully remove the jumper cables inthe reverse order of attachment.
3WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY
5
! WARNING:While the engine is running, keep hands,long hair and clothing away from mov-ing parts such as the fan and drive beltsto prevent injury.
5. If the water pump drive belt is brokenor coolant is leaking out, stop the en-gine immediately and call the nearestHyundai dealer for assistance
6. If you cannot find the cause of theoverheating, wait until the engine tem-perature has returned to normal. Then,if coolant has been lost, carefully addwater to the reservoir (Page 6-8) tobring the fluid level in the reservoir upto the halfway mark.
7. Proceed with caution, keeping alert forfurther signs of overheating. If over-heating happens again, call a Hyundaidealer for assistance.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR-ING SYSTEM (TPMS)
C320A01MC-AAT
(If Installed)
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 175/271
!
Hyundai dealer for assistance.
WARNING:Do not remove the radiator cap whenthe engine is hot. This may result incoolant being blown out of the opening
and cause serious burns.
! CAUTION:Serious loss of coolant indicates thereis a leak in the cooling system and thisshould be checked as soon as possibleby a Hyundai dealer.
C320A01TG
➀ Low Tire Pressure Telltale➁ TPMS Malfunction Indicator
Each tire, including the spare (if pro-
vided), should be checked monthlywhen cold and inflated to the inflationpressure recommended by the vehiclemanufacturer on the vehicle placard ortire inflation pressure label. (If yourvehicle has tires of a different sizethan the size indicated on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label,you should determine the proper tireinflation pressure for those tires.)
36
WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY
Low Tire Pressure Telltale
When the tire pressure monitoring sys-tem warning telltale is illuminated, oneor more of your tires is significantlyunder-inflated.Immediately reduce your speed, avoidhard cornering and anticipate increasedstopping distances. You should stopand check your tires as soon as pos-
sible Inflate the tires to the proper
As an added safety feature, your ve-hicle has been equipped with a TirePressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressuretelltale when one or more of your tiresis significantly under-inflated. Accord-ingly, when the low tire pressure tell-tale illuminates, you should stop andcheck your tires as soon as possible,and inflate them to the proper pres-sure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat
Your vehicle has also been equippedwith a TPMS malfunction indicator toindicate when the system is not oper-
ating properly. The TPMS malfunctionindicator is provided by a separatetelltale, which displays the symbol"TPMS" when illuminated. When themalfunction indicator is illuminated, thesystem may not be able to detect orsignal low tire pressure as intended.TPMS malfunctions may occur for avariety of reasons including the instal
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 176/271
sible. Inflate the tires to the properpressure as indicated on the vehicle’splacard or tire inflation pressure labellocated on the driver’s side centerpillar outer panel. If you cannot reacha service station or if the tire cannothold the newly added air, replace the
low pressure tire with the temporaryspare tire. Then the TPMS malfunc-tion indicator or the Low Tire Pressuretelltale may turn on after restarting andabout 20 minutes of continuous drivingbefore you have the low-pressure tirerepaired and replaced on the vehicle.
inflated tire causes the tire to overheatand can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiencyand tire tread life, and may affect thevehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not asubstitute for proper tire maintenance,and it is the driver’s responsibility tomaintain correct tire pressure, even ifunder-inflation has not reached thelevel to trigger illumination of the TPMSlow tire pressure telltale.
variety of reasons, including the instal-lation of replacement or alternate tiresor wheels on the vehicle that preventthe TPMS from functioning properly.Always check the TPMS malfunctionindicator after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement or alter-nate tires and wheels allow the TPMSto continue to function properly.
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 177/271
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 178/271
3WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY
9
!CAUTION:o Do not use any tire sealant if your
vehicle is equipped with a TirePressure Monitoring System. Theliquid sealant can damage thetire pressure sensors.
o In order for the system to cor-rectly monitor tires for under-in-flation, there should be a total ofexactly 4 sensors fitted to each of
!WARNING - TPMS
o The TPMS cannot alert you tosevere and sudden tire damagecaused by external factors suchas nails or road debris.
o If you feel any vehicle instability,immediately take your foot off theaccelerator, apply the brakesgradually and with light force,and slowly move to a safe posi-
This device complies with Part 15of the FCC rules.
Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and2. This device must accept any inter-
ference received, including interfer-ence that may cause undesired op-eration.
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 179/271
!
!y
the four driven wheel positions.There should be no other sen-sors in the vehicle including sparetire since this could cause thesystem to monitor the wrong sen-sors.
WARNING:Tampering with, modifying, or dis-abling the Tire Pressure MonitoringSystem (TPMS) components mayinterfere with the system's ability towarn the driver of low tire pressureconditions and/or TPMS malfunc-tions. Tampering with, modifying,or disabling the Tire Pressure Moni-toring System (TPMS) componentsmay void the warranty for that por-tion of the vehicle.
y ption off the road.
WARNING:Changes or modifications not ex-pressly approved by the party re-sponsible for compliance could voidthe user’s authority to operate theequipment.
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 180/271
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 181/271
312
WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY
Flat tire
D060C01A-AAT
2. Block the WheelD060B01MC-AAT
1. Obtain Spare Tire and ToolD060K01FC-AAT
Wheel Cap (If Installed)
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 182/271
D060C02MC
Block the wheel that is diagonallyopposite from the flat to keep thevehicle from rolling when the car israised on the jack.
Remove the spare tire and remove the jack and tool bag from the trunk.
NOTE:The spare tire and tool is locatedbeneath the luggage mat in the ve-hicle trunk or luggage compartment.
D060B01MC-A
1. Wrap a piece of cloth around the tipof the flat-head screwdriver to avoidscratching.
2. Insert the flat-head screwdriver intothe notch of the wheel cap and prygently to remove the wheel cap.
3. Change the flat tire.4. Reinstall the wheel cap by fitting
the boss of the wheel cap in thenotch of the wheel, hitting the cen-
ter of the wheel cap with your hand.
D060K02MC
3WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY
13
D060E01A-AAT
4. Put the Jack in PlaceD060D01A-AAT
3. Loosen Wheel NutsD060F02E-AAT
5. Raising the Car
Wrench bar
Wh l h
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 183/271
The base of the jack should be placedon firm, level ground. The jack shouldbe positioned as shown in the drawing.
1JBA6025
The wheel nuts should be loosenedslightly before raising the car. Toloosen the nuts, turn the wrenchhandle counterclockwise. When doing
this, be sure that the socket is seatedcompletely over the nut so it cannotslip off. For maximum leverage, posi-tion the wrench so the handle is to theright. Then, while holding the wrenchnear the end of the handle, pull up onit with steady pressure. Do not re-
move the nuts at this time. Just loosenthem about one-half turn.
D060D02MC
After inserting a wrench bar into thewheel nut wrench, install the wrenchbar into the jack as shown in thedrawing. To raise the vehicle, turn thewheel nut wrench clockwise. As the
jack begins to raise the vehicle, doublecheck that it is properly positioned andwill not slip. If the jack is on softground or sand, place a board, brick,flat stone or other object under the
base of the jack to keep it from sink-ing.Raise the car high enough so that thefully inflated spare tire can be installed.
Wheel nut wrenchD060F02MC
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 184/271
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 185/271
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 186/271
3WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY
17
CAUTION:o When towing the vehicle, take care
not to cause damage to the bumperor underbody of the vehicle.
1) If the vehicle is being towed with therear wheels on the ground, be sure theparking brake is released.
NOTE:Before towing, check the level of theautomatic transaxle fluid. If it is belowthe "HOT" range on the dipstick, addfluid. If you cannot add fluid, a towingdolly must be used.
2) If any of the loaded wheels or suspen-
sion components are damaged or thevehicle is being towed with the front
!D080B01O-GAT
Towing the Vehicle
1)
2)
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 187/271
!
wheels on the ground, use a towingdolly under the front wheels.
o Manual Transaxle:If you do not use a towing dolly, placethe ignition key in the "ACC" positionand put the transaxle in "N (Neutral)".
CAUTION:Do not tow with the key removed or inthe "LOCK" position when towing fromthe rear without a towing dolly.
D080B02MC
o Do not tow with sling type truck asthis may cause damage to thebumper or underbody of the vehicle.
D080B01MC
Your vehicle can be towed by wheel lifttype truck (1), (2) or flatbed equipment(3).
3) dolly
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 188/271
3WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY
19
CAUTION:- Automatic Transaxle
o If the car is being towed with all fourwheels on the ground, it can be towedonly from the front. Be sure that the
transaxle is in neutral. Be sure thesteering is unlocked by placing theig iti it h i th ACC iti A
!
OMC045014
(2)Take out the towing hook from the jack
How to Use Front Towing Hook (If Installed)
NOTE:Place the towing hook & towing holecover in its original position when not inuse.
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 189/271
ignition switch in the ACC position. Adriver must be in the towed vehicleto operate the steering and brakes.
o To avoid serious damage to the au-tomatic transaxle, limit the vehiclespeed to 10 mph (15 km/h) and drive
less than 1 mile (1.5 km) when tow-ing.
OMC045013
(1)Open the towing hole cover by push-ing it with your finger.
( ) g jcase. To mount the towing hook, ro-tate it clockwise.
NOTE:The jack case is located on the sparetire in the trunk or luggage compart-ment.
! CAUTIONIt should be tightened firmly with yourfingers until there is no more play in thetowing hole. Towing hook is located inthe jack case on the spare tire.
(3)Attach a tow cable, chain or strap to thetowing hook on the front bumper.
320
WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY
IF YOU LOSE YOUR KEYS
D120A01A-AAT
If you lose your keys, many Hyundaidealers can make you a new key if youhave your key number.If you lock the keys inside your car andyou cannot obtain a new key, manyHyundai dealers can use special tools toopen the door for you.
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 190/271
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 191/271
4
4CORROSION PREVENTION AND APPEARANCE CARE
2 CORROSION PROTECTION
E010B01A-AAT
Common Causes of Corrosion
The most common causes of corrosionon your car are:
o Road salt, dirt and moisture that isallowed to accumulate underneath thecar.
o Removal of paint or protective coat-ings by stones, gravel, abrasion orminor scrapes and dents which leaveunprotected metal exposed to corro-sion.
E010A01A-AAT
Protecting Your Hyundai from Cor-rosion
By using the most advanced design andconstruction practices to combat corro-sion, Hyundai produces cars of the high-est quality. However, this is only part ofthe job. To achieve the long term corro-sion resistance your Hyundai can deliver,the owner's cooperation and assistanceis also required.
E010D01A-AAT
Moisture Breeds Corrosion
Moisture creates the conditions in whichcorrosion is most likely to occur. For ex-ample, corrosion is accelerated by highhumidity, particularly when temperaturesare just above freezing. In such condi-tions, the corrosive material is kept incontact with the car surfaces by moisturethat is slow to evaporate.Mud is a particular enemy of corrosionprotection because it is slow to dry andholds moisture in contact with the ve-hicle. Even though the mud appears to
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 192/271
E010C01A-AAT
High-Corrosion Areas
If you live in an area where your car isregularly exposed to corrosive materials,corrosion protection is particularly impor-tant. Some of the common causes ofaccelerated corrosion are road salts, dustcontrol chemicals, ocean air and indus-trial pollution.
be dry, it can still retain moisture andpromote corrosion.High temperatures can also acceleratecorrosion of parts that are not properlyventilated so the moisture can be dis-persed. For all these reasons, it is par-ticularly important to keep your car cleanand free of mud or accumulations of othermaterials. This applies not only on thevisible surfaces but particularly to theunderside of the car.
4CORROSION PREVENTION AND APPEARANCE CARE
4CORROSION PREVENTION AND APPEARANCE CARE
3TO HELP PREVENT COR-ROSION
E020A01A-AAT
You can help prevent corrosion fromgetting started by observing the follow-ing:
E020B01A-AAT
Keep Your Car Clean
The best way to prevent corrosion is tokeep your car clean and free of corrosivematerials. Attention to the underside ofthe car is particularly important.
o If you live in a high-corrosion area —
E020C01A-AAT
Keep Your Garage Dry
Don't park your car in a damp, poorly
ventilated garage. This creates a favor-able environment for corrosion. This isparticularly true if you wash your car in
E020D02A-AAT
Keep Paint and Trim in Good Condi-tion
Scratches or chips in the finish should becovered with "touch-up" paint as soon aspossible to reduce the possibility of cor-rosion. If bare metal is showing through,the attention of a qualified body and paintshop is recommended.
Bird droppings : Bird droppings are highly
corrosive and may damage painted sur-faces in just a few hours. Always removebird droppings as soon as possible.
o When cleaning lower door panels,rocker panels and frame members, besure that drain holes are kept open sothat moisture can escape and not be
trapped inside to ac-celerate corro-sion.
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 193/271
where road salts are used, near theocean, areas with industrial pollution,acid rain, etc.— you should take extracare to prevent corrosion. In winter,hose off the underside of your car at
least once a month and be sure toclean the underside thoroughly whenwinter is over.
o When cleaning underneath the car,give particular attention to the compo-nents under the fenders and otherareas that are hidden from view.Do a thorough job; just dampening the
accumulated mud rather than washingit away will accelerate corrosion ratherthan prevent it. Water under high pres-sure and steam are particularly effec-tive in removing accumulated mud andcorrosive materials.
particularly true if you wash your car inthe garage or drive it into the garagewhen it is still wet or covered with snow,ice or mud. Even a heated garage cancontribute to corrosion unless it is wellventilated so moisture is dispersed.
E020E01A-AAT
Don't Neglect the Interior
Moisture can collect under the floor matsand carpeting to cause corrosion. Checkunder the mats periodically to be sure thecarpeting is dry. Use particular care if youcarry fertilizers, cleaning materials orchemicals in the car.These should be carried only in propercontainers and any spills or leaks shouldbe cleaned up, flushed with clear waterand thoroughly dried.
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 194/271
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 195/271
4
4CORROSION PREVENTION AND APPEARANCE CARE
6
E040A01A-AAT
To Clean the Vinyl Upholstery
To clean the vinyl upholstery, first removeloose dirt and dust with a vacuum cleaner.Then apply a solution of mild soap ordetergent and water using a clean spongeor soft cloth. Allow this to stay on thesurface to loosen the dirt, then wipe witha clean damp sponge or cloth. If all thedirt stains are not removed, repeat thisprocedure until the upholstery is clean.Do not use gasoline, solvent, paint thin-ner or other strong cleaners.
CLEANING THE INTERIOR
E030D01A-AAT
When to Wax Again
You should polish and wax the car againwhen water no longer beads on a cleansurface but spreads out over a largerarea.
E030E01A-AAT
Maintaining Bumpers
Special precautions must be observed to
preserve the appearance of the bumperson your Hyundai. They are:
E040B01A-AAT
To Clean the Leather Upholstery(If Installed)
In the normal course of use, leather up-holstered surfaces will, like any material,pick-up dust and dirt. This dust and dirtmust be cleaned off or it may work into thesurface of the leather, causing damage.
Fine leather needs care, and should becleaned when necessary. Washingleather thoroughly with soap and waterwill keep your leather lustrous, beautifuland ensure you have many years of wear.Take a piece of cheese cloth and using
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 196/271
o Be careful not to spill battery electro-lyte or hydraulic brake fluid on thebumpers. If you do, wash it off imme-diately with clean water.
o Be gentle when cleaning the bumper
surfaces. They are made of soft plasticand the surface can be damaged ifmistreated. Do not use abrasive clean-ers. Use warm water and mild soap orcarwashing solution.
o Do not expose the bumpers to hightemperatures. For example, if you haveyour car repainted, do not leave the
bumpers on the car if the car is goingto be placed in a high-temperaturepaint booth.
Take a piece of cheese cloth and usingany mild soap and lukewarm water, workup a good lather. Thoroughly wash theleather. Wipe clean with a slightly dampcloth and dry with soft cloth. Do this as
often as the leather becomes soiled.During tanning operations, sufficient oilsare incorporated through processing thatnone need be applied during the life ofthe leather. Oil applied to the finishedsurface will in no way help the leatherand may do more harm than good. Var-
nishes and furniture polishes shouldnever be used under any conditions.
4CORROSION PREVENTION AND APPEARANCE CARE
4CORROSION PREVENTION AND APPEARANCE CARE
7ANY QUESTIONS?
E050A01A-AAT
If you have any questions about the careof your car, consult your Hyundai dealer.
E040D01A-AAT
Cleaning the Seat Belts
To clean the seat belts, use a cloth orsponge with mild soap or detergent andwarm water. Do not use strong deter-gents, dye, bleach or abrasive materialson the seat belts as this may weaken thefabric.While cleaning the belts, inspect them forexcessive wear, cuts, fraying or othersigns of damage and replace them ifnecessary.
! CAUTION:When cleaning leather products (steer-
ing wheel, seats etc.), use neutral de-tergents or low alcohol content solu-tions. If you use high alcohol contentsolutions or acid/alkaline detergents,the color of the leather may fade or thesurface may get stripped off.
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 197/271
E040E01A-AAT
Cleaning the Windows
You may use any household windowcleaner on the windows. However, whencleaning the inside of the rear window becareful not to damage the rear windowdefroster wiring.
E040C01A-AAT
Cleaning the Carpets
Use a foam-type carpet cleaner. Clean-ers of this type are available in aerosol
cans in liquid form or powder. Read theinstructions and follow them exactly. Us-ing a vacuum cleaner with the appropri-ate attachment, remove as much dirt fromthe carpets as possible. Apply the foamfollowing the manufacturer's directions,then rub in overlapping circles. Do notadd water. These cleaners work bestwhen the carpet is kept as dry as pos-sible.
Maintenance Intervals ................................................... 5-2Scheduled Maintenance ............................................... 5-4Maintenance under Severe Usage Conditions ............ 5-6Explanation of Scheduled Maintenance Items ............. 5-7California Perchlorate Notice ...................................... 5-10
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
5
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 198/271
5 5
5VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
2 MAINTENANCE INTERVALS
F010A01A-AAT
Service Requirements
To ensure that you receive the greatestnumber of miles of satisfying operationfrom your Hyundai, certain maintenanceprocedures must be performed. Althoughcareful design and engineering have re-duced these to a minimum, those that arerequired are of the utmost importance.It is your responsibility to have thesemaintenance procedures performed tocomply with the terms of the warrantiescovering your new Hyundai. The Owner'sHandbook supplied with your new ve-hicle provides further information about
F010D01A-AAT
General Checks
These are the regular checks you shouldperform when you drive your Hyundai oryou fill the fuel tank. A list of these itemswill be found on page 6-4.
F010C01A-AAT
Specified Scheduled Procedures
These are the procedures such as in-spections, adjustments and replacementsthat are listed in the maintenance chartsstarting on page 5-4. These proceduresmust be performed at the intervals shownin the maintenance schedule to assurethat your warranty remains in effect. Al-though it is strongly recommended thatthey be performed by the factory-trainedor distributor-trained technicians at yourHyundai dealer, these procedures maybe performed at any qualified servicefacility.
F010E01A-AAT
Do-It-Yourself Maintenance
If you are mechanically inclined, own a
few tools that are required and want totake the time to do so, you can inspectand service a number of items. For moreinformation about doing it yourself see
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 199/271
F010B01A-AAT
Maintenance Requirements
The maintenance required for yourHyundai can be divided into three mainareas:
o Specified scheduled procedureso General checkso Do-it-yourself maintenance
pthese warranties.
yIt is suggested that genuine Hyundaiservice parts be used for any requiredrepairs or replacements. Other parts ofequivalent quality such as engine oil,engine coolant, manual or auto transaxleoil, brake fluid and so on which are notsupplied by Hyundai Motor Company orits distributor may be used without affect-ing your warranty coverage but you shouldalways be sure these are equivalent tothe quality of the original Hyundai parts.Your Owner's Handbook provides furtherinformation about your warranty cover-age.
information about doing it yourself, seeSection 6.
5VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
3SCHEDULED MAINTE-NANCE REQUIREMENTS
F020A02A-AAT
o Inspection should be performed anytime a malfunction is experienced orsuspected.
o Receipts for all emission control sys-tem services should be retained todemonstrate compliance with condi-tions of the emissions system war-ranty.
o After 120 months or 150,000 miles(240,000 km), continue to follow theprescribed maintenance intervals.
o For severe usage maintenance re-quirements, see page 5-6 of this sec-tion.
F010F01A-AAT
A Few Tips
o Whenever you have your Hyundaiserviced, keep copies of the servicerecords in your glove box. This willhelp ensure that you can documentthat the required procedures have beenperformed to keep your warranties ineffect. This is especially importantwhen service is not performed by anauthorized Hyundai dealer.
o If you choose to do your own mainte-nance and repairs, you may find ithelpful to have an official HyundaiShop Manual. A copy of this publica-
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 200/271
tion may be purchased at your Hyundaidealer's parts department.
5VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
4 SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE
150
240
120
MILES X 1000
KILOMETERS X 1000
MONTHS
EMISSION CONTROL ITEMS
ENGINE OIL AND FILTER
FUEL FILTER
No. DESCRIPTION
1
2
7.5
12
6
15
24
12
22.5
36
18
30
48
24
37.5
60
30
45
72
36
52.5
84
42
R
60
96
48
67.5
108
54
75
120
60
82.5
132
66
90
144
72
97.5
156
78
105
168
84
R
112.5
180
90
120
192
96
127.5
204
102
135
216
108
142.5
228
114
F030B02MC-AAT
R : Replace I : Inspect and, after inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary
F030A01A-AAT
The following maintenance services must be performed to assure good vehicle control and performance. Keep receipts for all vehicleservices to protect your warranty. Where both mileage and time are shown, the frequency of service is determined by whichever occursfirst.
Replace every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 201/271
I
I
I
RR
R
FUEL LINES, FUEL HOSES AND CONNECTIONS
VACUUM HOSE
VAPOR HOSE AND FUEL FILLER CAP
AIR CLEANER FILTERFUEL TANK AIR FILTER
SPARK PLUGS
3
4
5
67
8
I
I
I
II
I
I
I
I
I
RR
R
I
I
I
II
I
I
I
I
I
RR
R
I I
II
I
I
I
I
RR
R
I
I
I
II
I
I
I
I
I
RR
R
I
I
I
II
I
I
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 202/271
5VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
6
DRIVINGCONDITION
MAINTENANCEINTERVALS
ENGINE OIL AND FILTERAIR CLEANER FILTERSPARK PLUGSBRAKE PADS, CALIPERS AND ROTORS
REAR BRAKE DRUMS/LININGS,PARKING BRAKESTEERING GEAR BOX, LINKAGE
RRRI
I
I
MAINTENANCEOPERATIONMAINTENANCE ITEM
EVERY 3,750 MILES (6,000 KM) OR 6 MONTHSMORE FREQUENTLYMORE FREQUENTLYMORE FREQUENTLY
MORE FREQUENTLY
MORE FREQUENTLY
A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, KC, EB, HC, D, G, H
C, D, G, H
C, D, E, F, G, H, I
MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE USAGE CONDITIONS
F040A02MC-AAT
The following items must be serviced more frequently on cars normally used under severe driving conditions. Refer to the chart belowfor the appropriate maintenance intervals.
R : Replace I : Inspect and, after inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 203/271
& BOOTS/LOWER ARM BALL JOINTDRIVESHAFTS AND BOOTSTIMING BELTMANUAL TRANSAXLE OIL
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUIDCLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER
I
IRR
RR
MORE FREQUENTLY
EVERY 7,500 MILES (12,000 KM) OR 6 MONTHSEVERY 60,000 MILES OR 72 MONTHSEVERY 80,000 MILES (120,000 KM)
EVERY 60,000 MILES (96,000 KM)MORE FREQUENTLY
SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONSA - Repeatedly driving short distance of less than 5miles (8km) in normal
temperature or less than 10miles (16km) in freezing temperatureB - Extensive engine idling or low speed driving for long distances
C - Driving on rough, dusty, muddy, unpaved, graveled or salt- spread roadsD - Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive materials or in very coldweather
E - Driving in sandy areasF - Driving in heavy traffic area over 90°F (32°C)G - Driving on uphill, downhill, or mountain roadH - Towing a Trailer, or using a camper, or roof rackI - Driving as a patrol car, taxi, other commercial use or vehicle
towingJ - Driving over 100 MPH (170 Km/h)K - Frequently driving in stop-and-go conditions
C, D, E, F, G, H, I
C, E, FB, C, D, E, F, G, IA, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J
A, C, E, F, G, H, IC, E
5VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
7EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULEDMAINTENANCE ITEMS
F060D01A-AAT
o Fuel Lines, Fuel Hoses andConnections
Check the fuel lines, fuel hoses and con-nections for leakage and damage. Havea trained techincian, replace any dam-aged or leaking parts immediately.
F060C01A-AAT
o Fuel Filter
A clogged filter can limit the speed atwhich the vehicle may be driven, damagethe emission system and cause hard start-ing. If an excessive amount of foreign
tt l t i th f l t k th
F060M01A-AAT
o Engine Oil and Filter
The engine oil and filter should bechanged at the intervals specified in themaintenance schedule. If the car is beingdriven in severe conditions, more fre-quent oil and filter changes are required.
F060H01A-AAT
o Air Cleaner Filter
A Genuine Hyundai air cleaner filter isrecommended when the filter is replaced.
F060G01A-AAT
o Vapor Hose and Fuel Filler Cap
The vapor hose and fuel filler cap shouldbe inspected at those intervals specifiedin the maintenance schedule. Make surethat a new vapor hose or fuel filler cap iscorrectly replaced.
F060F01A-AAT
o Vacuum, Crankcase VentilationHoses
Inspect the surface of hoses for evidenceof heat and/or mechanical damage. Hardand brittle rubber cracking tears cuts F060J01A AAT
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 204/271
matter accumulates in the fuel tank, thefilter may require replacement more fre-quently.After installing a new filter, run the enginefor several minutes, and check for leaksat the connections.Fuel filters should be installed by trainedtechnicians.
and brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts,abrasions, and excessive swelling indi-cate deterioration. Particular attentionshould be paid to examine those hosesurfaces nearest to high heat sources,such as the exhaust manifold.Inspect the hose routing to assure thatthe hoses do not come in contact with anyheat source, sharp edges or moving com-ponent which might cause heat damageor mechanical wear. Inspect all hoseconnections, such as clamps and cou-plings, to make sure they are secure, andthat no leaks are present. Hoses shouldbe replaced immediately if there is anyevidence of deterioration or damage.
F060B01A-AAT
o Drive Belts
Inspect all drive belts for evidence of cuts,cracks, excessive wear or oil saturationand replace if necessary. Drive beltsshould be checked periodically for propertension and adjusted as necessary.
F060J01A-AAT
o Spark Plugs
Make sure to install new spark plugs ofthe correct heat range.
5VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
8
F070H01A-AAT
o Rear Brake Drums/Linings,Parking Brake
Check the rear brake drums and liningsfor scoring, burning, leaking fluid, brokenparts, and excessive wear. Inspect the
F070F01A-AAT
o Brake Hoses and Lines
Visually check for proper installation,chafing, cracks, deterioration and any
leakage. Replace any deteriorated ordamaged parts immediately.
F070E06A-AAT
o Automatic Transaxle Fluid
The fluid level should be in the “HOT”range of the dipstick, after the engine andtransaxle are at normal operating tem-perature. Check the automatic transaxlefluid level with the engine running andthe transaxle in neutral, with the parkingbrake properly applied. Use HYUNDAIGENUINE ATF SP III, DIAMOND ATF SPIII, SK ATF SP III or other brands meeting
the SP III specification approved byHyundai Motor Co. when adding or chang-ing fluid. Using the wrong ATF may resultin damage to the ATM.
F070D01A AAT
F060E01A-AAT
o Timing Belt
Inspect all parts related to the timing beltfor damage and deformation. Replace
any damaged parts immediately.
F070C01A-AAT
o Coolant
The coolant should be changed at theintervals specified in the maintenance
schedule.
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 205/271
parking brake system including the park-ing brake lever and cables. For detailedservice procedures, refer to the ShopManual.
F070G02A-AAT
o Brake Fluid
Check brake fluid level in the brake fluidreservoir. The level should be between"MIN" and "MAX" marks on the side of thereservoir. Use only hydraulic brake fluidconforming to DOT 3 or DOT 4.
F070D01A-AAT
o Manual Transaxle Oil
Inspect the manual transaxle oil accord-ing to the maintenance schedule.
NOTE:If the oil level is low, check for possibleleaks before adding oil. Do not overfill.
5VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
9
F070M01A-AAT
o Steering Gear Box, Linkage &Boots/Lower Arm Ball Joint
With the vehicle stopped and engine off,check for excessive free-play in the steer-ing wheel. Check the linkage for bends ordamage. Check the dust boots and ball
joints for deterioration, cracks, or dam-age. Replace any damaged parts.F070K01A-AAT
o Exhaust Pipe and Muffler
Visually inspect the exhaust pipes, muf-fler and hangers for cracks, deterioration,or damage. Start the engine and listencarefully for any exhaust gas leakage.Tighten connections or replace parts asnecessary
F070J01A-AAT
o Brake Pads, Calipers and Rotors
Check the pads for excessive wear, discsfor run out and wear, and calipers for fluid
leakage.
F070Q01A-AAT
o Air Conditioning Refrigerant
Check the air conditioning lines and con-nections for leakage and damage. Checkair conditioning performance accordingto the relevant shop manual if necessary.
F070P01A-AAT
o Driveshafts and Boots
Check the drive shafts, boots and clampsfor cracks, deterioration, or damage. Re-
place any damaged parts and, if neces-sary, repack the grease.
F070N01A-AAT
o Power Steering Pump, Belt andHoses
Check the power steering pump and
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 206/271
F070L01A-AAT
o Suspension Mounting BoltsCheck the suspension connections forlooseness or damage. Retighten to thespecified torque.
necessary. Check the power steering pump andhoses for leakage and damage. Replaceany damaged or leaking parts immedi-ately. Inspect the power steering belt forevidence of cuts, cracks, excessive wear,oiliness and proper tension. Replace oradjust it if necessary.
5VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
10 CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATENOTICE
F080A01NF-AAT
Perchlorate Material-special handlingmay apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/ hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
Notice to California Vehicle Dismantlers:Perchlorate containing materials, suchas airbag inflators, seatbelt pretensionersand keyless remote entry batteries, mustbe disposed of according to Title 22 Cali-fornia Code of Regulations Section67384.10 (a).
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 207/271
Engine Compartment .................................................... 6-2General Checks ............................................................ 6-4Maintenance Precautions ............................................. 6-5Checking the Engine Oil ............................................... 6-5Checking and Changing the Engine Coolant ................ 6-8Changing the Air Cleaner Filter ..................................... 6-9Checking the Transaxle Oil (Manual) ......................... 6-12Checking the Transaxle Fluid (Automatic) .................. 6-12Checking the Brakes .................................................. 6-14
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
6
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 208/271
Checking the Brakes .................................................. 6 14Air Conditioning Care .................................................. 6-15Changing the Climate Control Air Filter ....................... 6-16Checking and Replacing Fuses .................................. 6-17Checking the Battery .................................................. 6-20Power Steering Fluid Level ......................................... 6-22Replacement of Light Bulbs ........................................ 6-23Bulb Wattage............................................................... 6-29Fuse Panel Description ............................................... 6-30
6 6
6DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
2 ENGINE COMPARTMENT
G010A01MC-AAT
Type A
CAUTION:When inspecting or servicingthe engine, you should handletools and other heavy objectscarefully so that the plasticcover of the engine is not dam-
!
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 209/271
1. Engine coolant reservoir .......... 6-8
2. Engine oil filler cap .................. 6-73. Brake fluid reservoir ............... 6-144. Air cleaner filter ........................ 6-9
5. Windshield washer fluid
reservoir cap ........................... 6-116. Power steering fluid reservoir(If Installed) ............................. 6-22
7. Engine oil level dipstick ........... 6-6
8. Radiator cap ............................. 6-8
9. Automatic transaxle fluid leveldipstick (If Installed) ................ 6-1310. Battery ..................................... 6-2011. Fuse/Relay box ....................... 6-17
OMC059036
cover of the engine is not damaged.
6DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
3
G010A01MC-AAT
CAUTION:When inspecting or servicingthe engine, you should handletools and other heavy objectscarefully so that the plasticcover of the engine is not dam-
!
Type B
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 210/271
1. Engine oil filler cap .................. 6-7
2. Brake fluid reservoir ............... 6-143. Air cleaner filter ........................ 6-94. Fuse/Relay box ....................... 6-17
5. Windshield washer fluid
reservoir cap ........................... 6-116. Power steering fluid reservoir(If Installed) ............................. 6-22
7. Engine oil level dipstick ........... 6-6
8. Radiator cap ............................. 6-8
9. Automatic transaxle fluid leveldipstick (If Installed) ................ 6-1310. Engine coolant reservoir .......... 6-811. Battery ..................................... 6-20
OMC059036L
gaged.
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 211/271
6DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
5CHECKING THE ENGINE OIL
G030A01A-AAT
Engine oil is essential to the performanceand service of the engine. It is suggestedthat you check the oil level at least once
a week in normal use and more often ifyou are on a trip or driving in severeconditions.
G030B02O-AAT
Recommended Oil
MAINTENANCE PRECAU-TIONS
!G020D01TG-GAT
Improper or incomplete service may re-sult in problems. This section gives in-structions only for the maintenance items
that are easy to perform.Several procedures should be done byan authorized Hyundai dealer.
NOTE:Improper owner maintenance during thewarranty period may affect warrantycoverage.
WARNING:o Performing maintenance work on a
vehicle can be dangerous. You canbe seriously injured while perform-ing some maintenance procedures.If you lack sufficient knowledge andexperience or the proper tools andequipment to do the work, have itdone by an authorized Hyundaidealer.
o Working under the hood with the en-gine running is dangerous. It be-comes even more dangerous whenyou wear jewelry or loose clothing.These can become entangled in
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 212/271
The engine oil quality should meet thefollowing classification.
API Service SM* or above,
ILSAC GF-4 or above
* If the API service SM engine oil is notavailable in your country, you are ableto use API service SL.
G030B01JM-U
These can become entangled inmoving parts and result in injury.Therefore, if you must run the enginewhile working under the hood, make
certain that you remove all jewelry(especially rings, bracelets, watches,and necklaces) and all neckties,scarves, and similar loose clothingbefore getting near the engine orcooling fans.
6DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
6
G030C01JM-AAT
To Check the Oil Level
Before checking the oil, warm up theengine to the normal operating tempera-
OMC059003
NOTE:o SAE 5W-20 (5W-30), ILSAC GF-4 en-
gine oil is preferred regardless ofregional option and engine variation.
o If SAE 5W-20, ILSAC GF-4 engine oilis not available, SAE 5W-30 or sec-ondary recommended engine oil forcorresponding temperature rangecan be used.
! WARNING:Be very careful not to touch the radia-tor hose when checking the engine oilas it may be hot enough to burn you.
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 213/271
g p g pture and be sure it is parked on levelground. Turn the engine off.
Wait five minutes, then remove the dip-stick, wipe it off, fully reinsert the dipstickand withdraw it again. Then note thehighest level the oil has reached on thedipstick. It should be between the upper("F") and lower ("L") range.
6DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
7
! CAUTION:Slowly pour the recommended oil byusing a funnel. Do not overfill so as notto damage engine.
! WARNING:
Be very careful not to touch the radia-tor hose when adding the engine oil asit may be hot enough to burn you.
G030D03MC-AAT
Adding Oil
If the oil level is close to or below the "L"mark, add oil until it reaches the "F" mark.
OMC059004
! PROPOSITION 65 WARNING:Engine oil contains chemicals known tothe State of California to cause cancer,birth defects and reproductive harm.Used engine oil may cause irritation orcancer of the skin if left in contact withthe skin for prolonged periods of time.Always protect your skin by washingyour hands thoroughly with soap andwarm water as soon as possible after
handling used oil.
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 214/271
To add oil:
1. Remove the oil filler cap by turning it
counterclockwise.2. Add oil, then check the level again. Donot overfill.
3. Replace the cap by turning it clock-wise.
The distance between the "F" and "L"marks is equal to about 1 quart of oil.
NOTE:o It is recommended that the engine oil
and filter should be changed by an
authorized Hyundai dealer.o Always dispose of used engine oil in
an environmentally acceptable man-ner. It is suggested that it be placedin a sealed container and taken to aservice station for reclaimation. Donot pour the oil on the ground or putit into the household trash.
6DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
8 CHECKING AND CHANGINGTHE ENGINE COOLANT
!
G050A01TG-AAT
WARNING:Do not remove the radiator cap whenthe engine is hot. When the engine ishot, the engine coolant is under pres-sure and may erupt through the open-ing if the cap is removed. You could beseriously burned if you do not observethis precaution. Do not remove the ra-diator cap until the radiator is cool tothe touch.
NOTE:It is recommended that the engine cool-ant should be changed by an authorized
G050B01A-AAT
Recommended Engine Coolant
Use a high quality ethylene-glycol cool-ant in a 50/50 mix with water. The engine
coolant should be compatible with alumi-num engine parts. Additional corrosioninhibitors or additives should not be used.The cooling system must be maintainedwith the correct concentration and type ofengine coolant to prevent freezing andcorrosion.Never allow the concentration of anti-
freeze to exceed the 60% level or gobelow the 35% level or damage to thecoolant system may result. For properconcentration when adding or replacingthe coolant, refer to the following table.
G050C01TG-AAT
To Check the Coolant Level
Type BOMC059005
Type A
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 215/271
ant should be changed by an authorizedHyundai dealer.
the coolant, refer to the following table.
Water
65%
60%
50%
40%
Antifreezesolution
35%
40%
50%
60%
Ambienttemperature
°F (°C)
5 (-15)
-13 (-25)
-31 (-35)
-49 (-45)
Engine coolant
concentration
The coolant level can be seen on the sideof the plastic coolant reservoir. The levelof the coolant should be between the "L"and "F" lines on the reservoir when theengine is cool.
OMC059008
6DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
9
G070A03Y-AAT
The replacement of air cleaner filter isperformed in the following manner.
1. Unsnap the clips around the cover.
CHANGING THE AIRCLEANER FILTER
OMC055010
! WARNING:The cooling fan is controlled by enginecoolant temperature and may some-times operate even when the engine isnot running. Use extreme caution whenworking near the blades of the coolingfan so that you are not injured by arotating fan blade. As the engine cool-ant temperature decreases, the fan willautomatically shut off. This is a normal
condition.
CAUTION:o Engine coolant can damage the fin-
ish of your car. If you spill enginecoolant on the car, wash it off thor-oughly with clean water.
o The engine in your vehicle has alumi-num engine parts and must be pro-t t d b th l l l b
!
If the level is below the "L" mark, addengine coolant to bring it up between "L"and "F". If the level is low, inspect forcoolant leaks and recheck the fluid levelfrequently. If the level drops again, visityour Hyundai dealer for an inspectionand diagnosis of the reason.
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 216/271
1. Unsnap the clips around the cover.2. When this is done, the cover can be
lifted off, the old filter removed and thenew filter put in its place.
Genuine Hyundai replacement parts arerecommended.
tected by an ethylene-glycol basecoolant to prevent corrosion andfreezing.
Do not use hard water. Hard watercan cause engine damage from cor-rosion, overheating or freezing.
CAUTION:o Operating your vehicle without a
proper air filter in place can result inexcessive engine wear.
o When removing the air cleaner filter,be careful that dust or dirt does notenter the air intake. These may re-sult in damage to the air cleanerfilter.
!
6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
10 WINDSHIELD WIPERBLADES
G080A02A-AAT
The wiper blades should be carefullyinspected from time to time and cleanedto remove accumulations of road film or
other debris. To clean the wiper bladesand arms, use a clean sponge or clothwith a mild soap or detergent and water.If the wipers continue to streak or smearthe glass, replace them with genuineHyundai replacement parts or theirequivalent.
CAUTION:o Do not operate the wipers on dry
glass. This can result in more rapidf th i bl d d
! 2. Raise the wiper blade lightly and pullup it.
HHR5049
G080B01HR-GAT
Replacing the Wiper Blades
To replace the wiper blades, raise thewiper to the vertical.
To remove the wiper blade
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 217/271
wear of the wiper blades and mayscratch the glass.
o Keep the blade rubber out of contact
with petroleum products such asengine oil, gasoline, etc. 1. Push down the wiper blade with thelocking clip (1) pressed to detach itfrom the wiper arm.
HHR5048
(1)
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 218/271
6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
12
!
G100A01MC-GAT
Transaxle lubricant in the manualtransaxle should be checked at thoseintervals specified in the vehicle mainte-
nance schedule in Section 5.
!
CHECKING THE TRANSAXLEOIL (MANUAL)
! CAUTION:o Radiator anti-freeze (engine coolant)
should not be used in the washersystem because it will damage thecar's finish.
o The washer should not be operatedif the washer reservoir is empty.This can damage the washer fluidpump.
WARNING:It is always better to check the transaxleoil level when the engine is cool or cold.If the engine is hot, you should exercisegreat caution to avoid burning yourselfon hot engine or exhaust parts.
WARNING:o Windshield washer fluid agents con-
tain some amounts of alcohol and NOTE
G110A01MC-AAT
Transaxle fluid in the automatic transaxleshould be checked at those intervalsspecified in the vehicle maintenance
schedule in Section 5.NOTE:Automatic transaxle fluid is basically ared color. As driving distance increases,the fluid color turns darkish red gradu-ally. It is a normal condition and youshould not judge the need to replace
based upon the changing color.You must replace the automatictransaxle fluid in accordance with inter-vals specified in the vehicle mainte-nance schedule in section 5.
CHECKING THE TRANSAXLEFLUID (AUTOMATIC)
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 219/271
can be flammable under certain cir-cumstances. Do not allow sparks orflame to contact the washer fluid orthe washer fluid reservoir. Damageto the vehicle or its occupants couldoccur.
o Windshield washer fluid is poison-ous to humans and animals. Do notdrink windshield washer fluid. Seri-ous injury or death could occur.
NOTE:It is recommended that the manualtransaxle fluid should be checked by an
authorized Hyundai dealer.
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 220/271
6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
14 CHECKING THE BRAKES
G120A01A-AAT
G120B01A-AAT
Checking the Brake Fluid Level
CAUTION:Because brakes are essential to thesafe operation of the car, it is sug-gested that they be checked and in-spected by your Hyundai dealer. Thebrakes should be checked and in-spected for wear at those intervalsspecified in the vehicle maintenanceschedule in Section 5.
!! WARNING:The cooling fan is controlled by theengine coolant temperature and maysometimes operate even when the en-gine is not running. Use extreme cau-tion when working near the blades ofthe cooling fan, so that you are notinjured by a rotating fan blade. As theengine coolant temperature decreases,the fan will automatically shut off. Thisis a normal condition.
G120D01A-AAT
To Check the Fluid Level
The fluid level in the brake fluid reservoirshould be checked periodically. The levelshould be between the "MIN" and "MAX"
OMC055015
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 221/271
! WARNING:Use caution when handling brake fluid.It can damage your vision if it gets intoyour eyes. It will also damage yourvehicle's paint if spilled on it and notremoved immediately.
should be between the MIN and MAXmarks on the side of the reservoir. If thelevel is at or below the "MIN" mark, care-
fully add fluid to bring it up to "MAX". Donot overfill.
6DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
15
G140B01A-AAT
Checking the Air Conditioner Opera-tion
1. Start the engine and let it run at fast
idle for several minutes with the airconditioner set at the maximum coldsetting.
2. If the air coming out of the in-dashvents is not cold, have the air condi-tioning system inspected by yourHyundai dealer.
CAUTION:Running the air conditioning system forextended periods of time with a low
f ig t l l d g th
!
!
G120E02A-AAT
Adding Brake Fluid
WARNING:Handle brake fluid carefully. It can dam-age your vision if it gets into your eyes.Use only DOT 3 or DOT 4 specificationfluid from a sealed container. Do notallow the fluid can or reservoir to re-main open any longer than required.This will avoid entry of dirt and moisturewhich can damage the brake systemand cause improper operation.
To add brake fluid, first wipe away anydirt, then unscrew the fluid reservoir cap.
AIR CONDITIONER CARE
G140A01A-AAT
Keeping the Condenser Clean
The air conditioner condenser (and en-gine radiator) should be checked periodi-
cally for accumulation of dirt, dead in-sects, leaves, etc. These can interferewith maximum cooling efficiency. Whenremoving such accumulations, brush orhose them away carefully to avoid bend-ing the cooling fans.
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 222/271
refrigerant level may damage the com-pressor.
dirt, then unscrew the fluid reservoir cap.Slowly pour the recommended fluid intothe reservoir. Do not overfill. Carefully
replace the cap on the reservoir andtighten.
6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
16
G140C01A-AAT
Lubrication
To lubricate the compressor and the sealsin the system, the air conditioner should
be run for at least 10 minutes each week.This is particularly important during coolweather when the air conditioning sys-tem is not otherwise in use.
2. Pull out the climate control air filter withthe hooks on both sides pressed.
!
CHANGING THE CLIMATECONTROL AIR FILTER
B145A02MC-GAT
(For Evaporator and Blower Unit)
The climate control air filter is located infront of the evaporator unit behind the
glove box.It helps to decrease the amount of pollut-ants entering the car.
OMC055012
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 223/271
CAUTION:Be careful not to press the hooks in theopposite direction.
!
1. Open the glove box and remove theadjusting pins on both sides of theglove box.
B145A01MC
6DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
17
3. Take out the climate control air filterand replace it with a new one.
4. Installation is the reverse order of dis-assembly.
OMC055013
G200A01A-AAT
Replacing a Fusible Link
A fusible link will melt if the electricalcircuits from the battery are ever over-loaded, thus preventing damage to the
OMC045003
CAUTION:When replacing a fusible link, neveruse anything but a new fusible link withthe same or lower amperage rating.Never use a piece of wire or a higher-rated fusible link. This could result inserious damage and create a fire haz-ard.
!
CHECKING AND REPLAC-ING FUSES
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 224/271
entire wiring harness. (This could becaused by a short in the system drawingtoo much current.) If this ever happens,have a Hyundai dealer determine thecause, repair the system and replace thefusible link. The fusible links are locatedin a relay box for easy inspection.
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 225/271
6DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
19
CAUTION:An open fuse indicates that there is aproblem in the electrical circuit If you
!
G200C01CM-GAT
Power ConnectorNOTE:o If the power connector is pulled up
from the fuse panel, the warningchime, audio, clock and interiorlamps, etc., will not operate. The fol-lowing items must be reset after re-placement.- Digital Clock - Trip computer- Automatic heating and cooling con-
trol system- Audio
o Even though the power connector ispulled up, the battery can still bedischarged by operation of the head-lights or other electrical devices.
Your vehicle is equipped with a powerconnector to prevent battery discharge ifyour vehicle is parked without being op
G200F01MC
G200B02L
Good Open-Replace
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 226/271
problem in the electrical circuit. If youreplace a fuse and it blows as soon asthe accessory is turned on, the prob-lem is serious and should be referred toa Hyundai dealer for diagnosis and re-pair. Never replace a fuse with anythingexcept a fuse with the same or a loweramperage rating. A higher capacity fusecould cause damage and create a firehazard.
NOTE:See page 6-30 for the fuse panel de-scriptions.
your vehicle is parked without being op-erated for prolonged periods. Use thefollowing procedures before parking thevehicle for prolonged periods.
1. Turn off the engine.2. Turn off the headlights and tail lights.3. Open the driver’s side panel cover and
pull up the power connector.4. Insert the power connector in the op-
posite direction.
6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
20 CHECKING THE BATTERY
!
G210A01A-AAT
WARNING:Batteries can be dangerous! Whenworking with batteries carefully ob
o If battery fluid is on your skin, flush theaffected areas with water for at least 15minutes and then seek medical assis-tance.
o If battery fluid is in your eyes, rinse outyour eyes with water and get medicalassistance as soon as possible. Whileyou are being driven to get medicalassistance, continue to rinse your eyesby using a sponge or soft cloth saturat-ed with water.
o If you swallow battery fluid, drink alarge quantity of water or milk followedby milk of magnesia, eat a raw egg ordrink vegetable oil. Get medical assis-tance as soon as possible.
While batteries are being charged (eitherby a battery charger or by the vehicle's
OMC055018
G210B05A-AAT
Checking the Battery
Keep the battery clean. Any evidence ofcorrosion around the battery posts or ter-
minals should be removed using a solu-tion of household baking soda and warmwater. After the battery terminals are dry,cover them with a light coating of grease.
! PROPOSITION 65 WARNING:Battery posts, terminals, and relatedaccessories contain lead and lead com-pounds, chemicals known to the Stateof California to cause cancer, birth de-fects and reproductive harm. Batteriesalso contain other chemicals known toth St t f C lif i t
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 227/271
working with batteries, carefully ob-serve the following precautions to avoidserious injuries.
by a battery charger or by the vehicle'salternator), they produce explosive gases.Always observe these warnings to pre-vent injuries from occurring:
o Charge batteries only in a well venti-lated area.
o Do not permit flames, sparks or smok-ing in the area.
o Keep children away from the area.
The fluid in the battery contains a strongsolution of sulfuric acid, which is poison-ous and highly corrosive. Be careful notto spill it on yourself or the car. If you dospill battery fluid on yourself, immediatelydo the following:
the State of California to cause cancer.Wash hands after handling.
6DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
21
!
G220A01A-AAT
G220B01A-AAT
Checking Engine Cooling Fan
WARNING:The radiator fan is controlled by enginecoolant temperature and may some-times operate even when the engine isnot running. Use extreme caution whenworking near the blades of the coolingfan, so that you are not injured by arotating fan blade. As the coolant tem-perature decreases the fan will auto-matically shut off. This is a normal con-dition.
CHECKING ELECTRICCOOLING FANS
!Wear eye protection whencharging or working near abattery.Always provide ventilationwhen working in an enclosedspace.An inappropriately disposedbattery can be harmful to theenvironment and humanhealth. Dispose the batteryaccording to your local law(s)or regulation.
o When lifting a plastic-cased battery,excessive pressure on the case maycause battery acid to leak, resultingin personal injury Lift with a battery
WARNING:Always read the following in-structions carefully when han-dling a battery.Keep lighted cigarettes andall other flames or sparksaway from the battery.Hydrogen, which is a highlycombustible gas, is alwayspresent in battery cells andmay explode if ignited.Keep batteries out of the reachof children because batteriescontain highly corrosive SUL-FURIC ACID. Do not allow bat-tery acid to contact your skin,eyes clothing or paint finish
! WARNING:
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 228/271
The engine cooling fan should come onautomatically if the engine coolant tem-
perature is high.
G220C01A-AAT
Checking Condenser Cooling Fan
The condenser cooling fan should comeon automatically whenever the air condi-
tioner is in operation.
in personal injury. Lift with a batterycarrier or with your hands on oppo-site corners.
o Never attempt to charge the batterywhen the battery cables are con-nected.
o The electrical ignition system workswith high voltage.Never touch these components withthe engine running or the ignition
switched on.
eyes, clothing or paint finish.If any electrolyte gets intoyour eyes, flush your eyeswith clean water for at least15 minutes and get immedi-ate medical attention. If pos-sible, continue to apply waterwith a sponge or cloth untilmedical attention is received.If electrolyte gets on your skin,thoroughly wash the con-tacted area.If you feel a pain or a burningsensation, get medical atten-tion immediately.
6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
22
G240A01A-AAT
POWER STEERING HOSES
It is suggested that you check the powert i h ti f fl id l k
POWER STEERING FLUIDLEVEL
G230A01MC-AAT
(If Installed)
The power steering fluid level should bechecked regularly. To check the powersteering fluid level, be sure the engine is"OFF", then check to make certain that the
NOTE:o Grinding noise from the power steer-
ing pump may be heard immediatelyafter the engine is started in ex-tremely cold conditions (below -4°F).If the noise stops during warm up,there is no abnormal function in thesystem. It is due to a power steeringfluid characteristic in extremely coldconditions.
o Do not start the engine when thepower steering oil reservoir is empty.
OMC055014
FOR MORE INFORMATIONABOUT YOUR HYUNDAI
G250A01A-AAT
If you desire additional information aboutmaintaining and servicing your Hyundai,you may purchase a factory Shop Manualat your Hyundai dealer's parts depart-ment. This is the same manual used bydealership technicians and while it ishighly technical it can be useful in obtain-ing a better understanding of your carand how it works.
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 229/271
steering hose connections for fluid leak-age at those intervals specified in the
vehicle maintenance schedule in Section5.The power steering hoses should be re-placed if there is severe surface cracking,pulling, scuffing or worn spots. Deteriora-tion of the hose could cause prematurefailure.
OFF , then check to make certain that thepower steering fluid level is between the"MAX" and "MIN" level markings on thefluid reservoir.
6DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
23REPLACEMENT OF LIGHTBULBS
!
G260A01MC-AAT
Before attempting to replace a light bulb,be sure the switch is turned to the "OFF"position.The next paragraph shows how to reachthe light bulbs so they may be changed.Be sure to replace the burned-out bulbwith one of the same number and watt-age rating.See page 6-29 for the wattage descrip-tions.
CAUTION:o Keep the lamps out of contact with
petroleum products, such as oil,gasoline, etc.
o If you don't have necessary tools,
G270A02MC-GAT
Headlight, Front Turn Signal Lightand Front Fog Light CAUTION:
o The headlight aiming should bechecked by an authorized Hyundaidealer after replacing the headlightbulbs.
o After heavy, driving rain or washing,headlight and taillight lenses couldappear frosty. This condition iscaused by the temperature differ-ence between the lamp inside and
outside. This is similar to the con-densation on your windows insideyour vehicle during the rain anddoesn’t indicate a problem with yourvehicle. If the water leaks into thelamp bulb circuitry, have the vehicle
!
OMC055021
Turn signallight
Headlight
Fog light
Type A
Type B
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 230/271
Headlight
1. Allow the bulb to cool. Wear eye pro-tection.
2. Open the engine hood and disconnectthe negative (-) post of the battery.
3. Always grasp the bulb by its plasticbase, avoid touching the glass.
4. Disconnect the power cord from theback of the headlight.
the correct bulbs and the expertise,consult your authorized Hyundaidealer.
checked by an authorized Hyundaidealer.
OMC050021
Headlight
Turn signallight
Fog light
6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
24
G270A03O
! WARNING:o When removing/replacing halogen
bulbs, always handle the metal bodyof the bulb, not the glass.
5. Remove the socket cover.6. Push the bulb spring to remove the
headlight bulb.7. Remove the protective cap from the
replacement bulb and install the newbulb by matching the plastic base with
OMC055022
Front Turn Signal light
1. Open the engine hood and disconnectthe negative (-) post of the battery.
2. Disconnect the power cord from thebulb
OMC055023
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 231/271
o The halogen bulb contains gas underpressure and if impacted could shat-ter, resulting in flying fragments. Al-ways wear eye protection when ser-vicing the bulb. Protect the bulbagainst abrasions or scratches andagainst liquids when lighted. Turnthe bulb on only when installed in aheadlight. Replace the headlight ifdamaged or cracked. Keep the bulbout of the reach of children and dis-pose of the used bulb with care.
bulb by matching the plastic base withthe headlight hole. Reattach the bulb
spring and install the socket cover.Reconnect the power cord.8. Use the protective cap and carton to
dispose of the old bulb.9.Check for proper headlight aim.
bulb.3. Take out the bulb from the bulb holder
by turning it counterclockwise.4. Install the new bulb.
Front Fog Light (If Installed)NOTE:It is recommended that the front foglight bulb be replaced by an authorizedHyundai dealer.
6DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
25
OMC055026
3. Remove the nuts of the rear combina-tion light with a spanner.
G270D01MC-AAT
Rear Combination Light1. Open the trunk lid (4 Door) or tail gate
(3 Door).
OMC055024
OMC055025
2. Remove the cover on the inside ofluggage trim
4 Door
4 Door 4 Door
3 Door
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 232/271
4. Detach the rear combination lamp bypulling it out (4 Door) or remove the
mounting screws of the rear combina-tion lamp with a phillips screwdriver (3Door).
luggage trim.
OMC055026-1
6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
26
5. To replace the rear combination light,take it out from the bulb holder byturning it counterclockwise.
(1) Tail Light(2) Turn Signal Light
OMC055027
G270C01MC-GAT
Luggage Compartment Light
OMC0550283. Replace with a new bulb.
HTB284
3 Door
4 Door
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 233/271
OMC055028-1
( ) g g(3) Back-up Light(4) Stop/Tail Light
6. Install the new bulb.
1. Open the trunk lid (4 Door) or tail gate(3 Door).2. Carefully remove the cover with a flat-
head screwdriver.
6DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
27
G270G01MC-GAT
Map Light (If Installed)
1. Remove the cover with a flat-headscrewdriver.
2. Replace with a new bulb.
OMC055029
G270E01A-GAT
Side Repeater Light(If Installed)
1. Push the cover toward the front ofvehicle and remove it.
2. Disconnect the power code.
G220200AEN
Side Repeater Light(If Installed)
OMC029250
If the light bulb is not operating, have thevehicle checked by an authorizedHyundai dealer
G270E01MC
Type A Type B
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 234/271
3. Replace with a new bulb.Hyundai dealer.
6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
28
G275H01MC-GAT
Interior Light
1. Remove the cover with a flat-headscrewdriver.
2. Replace with a new bulb.
OMC055030
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 235/271
6DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
29BULB WATTAGE
G280A03MC-AAT
OMC059020L
Bulb Type Part NamePart NameNo. No.Wattage Wattage Bulb Type
4 Door 3 Door
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 236/271
HB2 Long Life
2357
10W (FESTOON)
10W (FESTOON)
GE881
LED Type
Side Repeater Light (If Installed)
Stop/Tail Light
High Mounted Rear Stop Light
Luggage Compartment Light
Rear Turn Signal Light
Back-up Light
License Plate Light
Headlight (High/Low)
Front Turn Signal Light/
Side Marker Light
Map Light (If Installed)
Interior Light
Front Fog Light (If Installed)
Side Repeater Light (If Installed)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
55/60
28/8
10
10
27
0.4
5
27/8
16
5
27
16
5
WY5W
1157
W16W
C5W
1156
W16W
C5W
6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
30 FUSE PANEL DESCRIPTION
FUSE RATING125A50A40A40A
40A40A30A30A30A30A30A20A
15A
10A10A10A10A
G200C01MC-AAT
Engine CompartmentCIRCUIT PROTECTED
GeneratorI/P Junction BoxBlower Relay, Blower MotorABS Control Module, Multipurpose Check ConnectorABS Control Module, Multipurpose Check ConnectorStart Relay, Ignition SwitchIgnition SwitchI/P Junction Box, Tail Lamp RelayI/P Junction Box, Power Window RelayRadiator Fan RelayMain Relay, Fuel Pump RelayECM, PCMInjector #1, #2, #3, #4, CVVT Oil Control Valve, Immobilizer Control Module,PurgeControl Solenoid Valve, Idle Speed Control Actuator, Fuel Pump RelayA/Con RelayA/C Control ModuleECM, PCMHorn Relay, Burglar Alarm Horn RelayA/Con Relay Rad Fan Relay Cond Fan Relay #1 #2 Camshaft Position
MAINBATT #1BLOWERABS #1ABS #2IGN #2IGN #1
BATT #2P/WDW
RADECU AECU C
INJ
A/CON #1A/CON #2
ECU BHORN
FUSE
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 237/271
10A
30A
NOTE:Not all fuse panel descriptions in this manual may be applicable to your vehicle. It is accurate at the time of printing. When youinspect the fuse box on your vehicle, refer to the fuse box label.
A/Con Relay, Rad Fan Relay, Cond Fan Relay #1, #2, Camshaft PositionSensor,Oxygen Sensor(UP, DOWN), Mass Air Flow SensorCondenser Fan Relay #1
SNSR
COND
G200C01MC
6DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
31
G200E01MC-AAT
Inner PanelFUSE RATING
25A
25A10A
25A10A
10A
15A25A10A10A
20A
10A
10A
30A25A
CIRCUIT PROTECTEDDriver Power Window Switch, Assist Power Window Switch,Rear Power WindowSwitch RHDriver Power Window Switch, Rear Power Window Switch LHPower Outside Mirror Switch, Digital Clock, Audio
Cigarette Lighter, Power OutletHead Lamp LH, DRL Control ModuleECM, Driver Power Outside Mirror Motor,Assist Power Outside Mirror Motor, PCM,Rear Defogger SwitchMulti-function Swicth, Rear Wiper MotorMulti-function Switch, Front Wiper MotorRear Combination Lamp LH, License Lamp LH(3DOOR),Turn Signal Lamp LHFront Fog RelayDriver Seat Warmer Switch, Assist Seat Warmer SwitchActive Interior & Humidity Sensor, A/C Control Module, BCM, Blower Relay, SunroofMotorRear Combination Lamp RH, License Lamp RH(3DOOR), License Lamp(4DOOR),Shunt Connector, Turn Signal Lamp RHBCM, Rear Defogger, Rear Defogger RelayAMP
P/WDW RH
P/WDW LHAUDIO
C/LIGHTERH/LP (LH)
HTD MIRR
RR WIPERFR WIPER
TAIL LP (LH)IGN
HTD SEAT
BLOWER
TAIL LP (RH)
HTD GLASSAMP
FUSE
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 238/271
G200E01MC
25A10A10A15A10A
AMPHead Lamp RH, Instrument Cluster, DRL Control ModuleHazard Relay, Hazard SwitchSRS Control ModuleTelltale Lamp, Passenger Seat Track Position Sensor
AMPH/LP (RH)HAZARDA/BAGSNSR
6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
32
FUSE RATING
10A
20A10A
10A
15A
10A10A
20A
10A
10A
15A
15A
CIRCUIT PROTECTEDFront Fog Lamp Switch, Front Fog Lamp LH, Front Fog Lamp RH, Front FogLamp RelaySunroof MotorHazard Switch
Overdrive Switch, Vehicle Speed SensorData Link Connector, Stop Lamp Switch, P/WDW Relay,Multipurpose CheckConnectorInstrument ClusterECM, PCMDriver Door Lock Actuator, Assist Door Lock Actuator, BCM,Rear Door LockActuator LH, Rear Door Lock Actuator RH,Driver Power Window Switch, TailGate Lock ActuatorStart Relay, Burglar Alarm RelayBCM, Instrument Cluster, Generator, DRL Control Module, Tire PressureMonitoring Module, Pre-excitation ResistorIgnition Coil #1, #2, #3, #4, Condenser
Audio
Luggage Lamp, Room Lamp, Vanity Lamp Switch, Digital Clock,Overhead
FR FOG LP
S/ROOFT/SIG LP
TCU
STOP LP
A/BAG INDECU
C/DR LOCK
START
CLUSTER
IGN COILAUDIO
(Power Connector)
FUSE
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 239/271
10A
10A10A10A
Luggage Lamp, Room Lamp, Vanity Lamp Switch, Digital Clock,OverheadConsole Lamp, A/C Control Module, Instrument Cluster, Door Warning Switch,BCM, Tire Pressure Monitoring ModuleABS Control Module, Multipurpose Check ConnectorBack-up Lamp Switch, Transaxle Range Switch, Multipurpose Check ConnectorDRL Control Module
MULT B/UP
(Power Connector)
ABSB/UP LP
DRL
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS
7
Emission Control System ............................................. 7-2Catalytic Converter ....................................................... 7-3
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 240/271
7
7 EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS
2 EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
Canister
Fuel vapors generated inside the fueltank are absorbed and stored in theonboard canister. When the engine is
running, the fuel vapors absorbed in thecanister are drawn into the induction sys-tem through the purge control solenoidvalve.
Purge Control Solenoid Valve (PCSV)
The purge control solenoid valve is con-trolled by the Engine Control Module(ECM); when the engine coolant tem-perature is low during idling, the PCSVcloses so that evaporated fuel is not takeninto the engine. After the engine warms-up during ordinary driving, the PCSVopens to introduce evaporated fuel to theengine
H010B01A-AAT
1. Crankcase Emission ControlSystem
The positive crankcase ventilation sys-tem is employed to prevent air pollutioncaused by blow-by gases being emittedfrom the crankcase. This system suppliesfiltered fresh air to the crankcase throughthe air intake hose. Inside the crankcase,the fresh air mixes with blow-by gases,then passes through the PCV valve intothe induction system.
H010A01A-AAT
Your Hyundai is equipped with an emis-sion control system to meet all require-ments of the U.S. Environmental Protec-tion Agency or California Air ResourcesBoard.There are three emission control systemswhich are as follows.
1) Crankcase Emission Control System2) Evaporative Emission Control System3) Exhaust Emission Control System
In order to ensure the proper function ofthe emission control systems, it is recom-mended that you have your car inspectedand maintained by an authorized Hyundaidealer in accordance with the mainte-nance schedule in this manual.
H010C01S-AAT
2. Evaporative Emission Control (In-cluding ORVR: Onboard Refuel-ing Vapor Recovery) System
Th E ti E i i C t l S
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 241/271
engine.The Evaporative Emission Control Sys-
tem is designed to prevent fuel vaporsfrom escaping into the atmosphere.(The ORVR system is designed to allowthe vapors from the fuel tank to be loadedinto a canister while refueling at the gasstation, preventing the escape of fuelvapors into the atmosphere.)
7EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS
3CATALYTIC CONVERTER
!H010D02A-AAT
3. Exhaust EmissionControl System
The Exhaust Emission Control System isa highly effective system which controlsexhaust emissions while maintaininggood vehicle performace.
H020A03A-AAT
(If Installed)
Hyundai vehicle is equipped with a mono-lith type three-way catalytic converter toreduce the carbon monoxide, hydrocar-bons and nitrogen oxides contained inthe exhaust gas. Exhaust gases passing
H020A01MCCatalytic Converter
WARNING:o Use unleaded fuel only.o Maintain the engine in good operat-
ing condition. Extremely high cata-lytic converter temperatures can re-sult from improper operation of theelectrical, ignition or multiport elec-tronic fuel injection.
o If your engine stalls, pings, knocks,or is hard to start, have your Hyundaidealer inspect and repair the prob-lem as soon as possible.
o Avoid driving with a very low fuellevel. Running out of gasoline maycause the engine to misfire and re-sult in damage to the catalytic con-verter.
o Avoid idling the engine for periods
! PROPOSITION 65 WARNING:Engine exhaust and a wide variety of
automobile components and parts, in-cluding components found in the inte-rior furnishings in a vehicle, contain oremit chemicals known to the State ofCalifornia to cause cancer and birthdefects and reproductive harm. In addi-tion, certain fluids contained in vehiclesand certain products of component
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 242/271
g g p gthrough the catalytic converter cause it tooperate at a very high temperature. Theintroduction of large amounts of unburnedgasoline into the exhaust may cause thecatalytic converter to overheat and createa fire hazard. This risk may be reduced byobserving the following:
longer than 10 minutes.o The vehicle should not be pushed or
pulled to get started. This may causethe catalytic converter to overheatand create a fire hazard.
and certain products of component
wear contain or emit chemicals knownto the State of California to cause can-cer and birth defects or other repro-ductive harm.
7 EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS
4
! WARNING:o Do not touch the catalytic converter
or any other part of the exhaust sys-
tem while the catalytic converter ishot. Shut off the engine, wait for atleast one hour before touching thecatalytic converter or any other partof the exhaust system.
o Remember that your Hyundai dealeris your best source of assistance.
o Do not park, idle or drive your ve-hicle over any combustible materialsuch as grass, paper, leaves or rags.These materials might contact thehot catalytic converter and a firemight result.
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 243/271
CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTINGSAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING
ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ............................. 8-2Engine Number ............................................................. 8-3Tire Information ............................................................. 8-3Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressures .............. 8-3Checking Tire Inflation Pressure .................................. 8-6Tire Sidewall Labeling ................................................... 8-6
Tire Terminology and Definitions .................................. 8-8All Season Tires ......................................................... 8-10Snow Tires.................................................................. 8-10Tire Chains ................................................................. 8-11Tire Rotation ............................................................... 8-11Tire Balancing ............................................................. 8-12 8
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 244/271
Tire Traction................................................................ 8-12When to Replace Tires ............................................... 8-12Tire Maintenance ........................................................ 8-13Spare Tire and Tools .................................................. 8-14Warranties for Your Hyundai Vehicle ......................... 8-15Consumer Information ................................................ 8-15Reporting Safety Defects ........................................... 8-18Binding Arbitration of Warranty Claims ...................... 8-18
8
8 CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS
2 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATIONNUMBER (VIN)
I010A02MC-AAT The vehicle identification number (VIN) isthe number used in registering your carand in all legal matters pertaining to itsownership, etc. It can be found in fourdifferent places on your car:
1. The number is punched on floor underthe front passenger seat. To check thenumber, remove the cover.
2. The VIN is also on a plate attached tothe top of the dashboard. The numberon the plate can easily be seen throughthe windshield from outside.
3. The vehicle certification label attachedon the driver's side center pillar givesthe vehicle identification number (VIN).
4. On the lower side of the center pillarouter panel.
1JBA5003
OMC079011
1
2
3
4
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 245/271
OMC079010
1JBA5005
8CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS
3ENGINE NUMBER
I010B01A-AAT
The engine number is stamped on theengine block as shown in the drawing.
TIRES
I020A02A-AAT
TIRE INFORMATION
The tires supplied on your new Hyndaiare chosen to provide the best perfor-
mance for normal driving.If you ever have questions about yourtire warranty and where to obtain ser-vice, see the tire manufacture's book-let included with your vehicle's Owner'sManual Literature Kit.
I030A02MC-AAT
RECOMMENDED COLD TIRE INFLA-TION PRESSURES
Tire label located on the driver's sideof the center pillar outer panel givesthe cold tire pressures recommendedfor your vehicle with the original tire
OMC079012
OMC065001
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 246/271
for your vehicle with the original tiresize, the number of people that can bein your vehicle and vehicle capacityweight.
8 CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS
4
!
These pressures were chosen to pro-vide the most satisfactory combina-tion of ride comfort, tire wear andstability under normal conditions. Tire
pressures should be checked at leastmonthly. Proper tire inflation pressuresshould be maintained for these rea-sons:
WARNING:o Inspect your tires frequently for
proper inflation as well as wearand damage. Always use a tirepressure gauge.
o Tires with too much or too littlepressure wear unevenly causingpoor handling, loss of vehicle
OMC040405 OMC040407
Type A
Type B
Type C
Type D
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 247/271
p g,
control, and sudden tire failureleading to accidents, injuries, andeven death. The recommendedcold tire pressure for your ve-hicle can be found in this manualand on the tire label located onthe driver's side of the center
pillar.OMC040406 OMC040408
8CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS
5
!
!
o Worn tires can cause accidents.Replace tires that are worn, showuneven wear, or are damaged.See page 8-12.
o Remember to check the pressureof your spare tire. Hyundai rec-ommends that you check thespare every time you check thepressure of the other tires on
your vehicle.
WARNING:
CAUTION:Always observe the following:
o Check pressures when the tiresare cold. (After the vehicle hasbeen parked for at least threehours or hasn't been driven morethan one mile (1.6 km) since start-ing up.)
o Check the pressure of your sparetire each time you check the pres-sure of other tires.
o Never overload your vehicle. Beespecially careful about overload-ing if you equip your vehicle witha luggage rack
!WARNING:
NOTE:o Underinflation also results in ex-
cessive wear, poor handling andreduced fuel economy. Wheel de-
formation also is possible. Keepyour tire pressures at the properlevels. If a tire frequently needsrefilling, have it checked by yourHyundai Dealer.
o Overinflation produces a harshride, excessive wear at the centerof the tire tread, and a greaterpossibility of damage from roadhazards.
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 248/271
Overinflation or underinflation canreduce the tire life, adversely affectvehicle handling, and lead to sud-den tire failure. This could rusult inloss of vehicle control and potentialinjury.
a luggage rack.o Worn, old tires can cause acci-
dents. If your tread is badly worn,or if your tires have been dam-aged, replace them.
8 CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS
6
If you overfill the tire, release air bypushing on the metal stem in thecenter of the tire valve. Recheck thetire pressure with the tire gauge. Be
sure to put the valve caps back on thevalve stems. They help prevent leaksby keeping out dirt and moisture.
Federal law requires tire manufactur-ers to place standardized informationon the sidewall of all tires. This infor-mation identifies and describes thefundamental characteristics of the tire
I030B01MC-AAT
TIRE SIDEWALL LABELING
I030B04JM
1
23
4
5, 6
7
1
I035A01JM-AAT
CHECKING TIRE INFLATION PRES-SURE
Check your tires once a month or
more. Also, check the tire pressure ofthe spare tire.
How to Check
Use a good quality gauge to check tirepressure. You can not tell if your tiresare properly inflated simply by lookingat them. Radial tires may look properlyinflated even when they're underinflated.Check the tire's inflation pressure whenthe tires are cold. - "Cold" means yourvehicle has been sitting for at leastthree hours or driven no more than 1
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 249/271
and also provides the tire identificationnumber (TIN) for safety standard cer-tification. The TIN can be used toidentify the tire in case of a recall.
mile (1.6 km).Remove the valve cap from the tirevalve stem. Press the tire gauge firmlyonto the valve to get a pressure mea-surement. If the cold tire inflation pres-sure matches the recommended pres-sure on the tire and loading informationlabel, no further adjustment is neces-sary. If the pressure is low, add airuntil you reach the recommendedamount.
8CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS
7
1. Manufacturer or Brand nameo Manufacturer or Brand name is
shown.2. Tire size (example: P175/70R14)
o The "P" indicates the tire is de-signed for passenger vehicles. A"T" is the designation for a tempo-rary spare tire.
o Three-digit number (175): Thisnumber gives the width in millime-ters of the tire from sidewall edgeto sidewall edge.
o Two-digit number (70): This num-ber, known as the aspect ratio,gives the tire's ratio of height towidth.
o R: The "R" stands for radial.
o T: Speed Rating. The speed rat-ing denotes the speed at which atire is designed to be driven forextended periods of time. The
ratings range from "A" to "Z" (98to 186 MPH).3. TIN (Tire Identification Number) for
new tire (example: DOT XX XXXXX XXXX)o DOT: Abbreviation for the "De-
partment of Transportation". Thesymbol can be placed above, be-low or to the left or right of the TireIdentification Number. Indicatestire is in compliance with the U.S.Department of TransportationMotor Vehicle Safety Standards.
o 1st two-digit code: Manufacturer's
4. Tire ply composition and mate-rialThe number of layers or plies ofrubbercoated fabric in the tire. Tire
manufacturers also must indicatethe materials in the tire, which in-clude steel, nylon, polyester, andothers. The letter "R" means radialply construction; the letter "D" meansdiagonal or bias ply construction;and the letter "B" means belted-biasply construction.
5. Maximum permissible inflationpressureThis number is the greatest amountof air pressure that should be put inthe tire. Do not exceed the maxi-mum permissible inflation pressure
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 250/271
o Two-digit number (14): This num-ber is the wheel or rim diameter ininches.
o Two (or three) digit number (84):This number is the tire's load in-dex. It is a measurement of howmuch weight each tire can sup-
port.
o 1st two-digit code: Manufacturer sidentification mark
o 2nd two-digit code: Tire sizeo 3rd three-digit code: Tire type code
(Optional)o 4th four-digit code: Date of Manu-
facture
o Four numbers represent the weekand year the tire was built. Forexample, the numbers 3109means the 31st week of 2009.
mum permissible inflation pressure.Refer to the Tire and Loading Infor-mation label for recommended infla-tion pressure.
8 CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS
8
I030D01JM-AAT
TIRE TERMINOLOGY AND DEFINI-TIONS
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside
the tire pressing outward on the tire.Air pressure is expressed in poundsper square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).Accessory Weight: This means thecombined weight of optional accesso-ries. Some examples of optional ac-cessories are, automatic transmission,
power seats, and air conditioning.Aspect Ratio: The relationship of atire's height to its width.Belt: A rubber coated layer of cordsthat is located between the plies andthe tread. Cords may be made fromsteel or other reinforcing materials.
Cold Tire Pressure: The amount ofair pressure in a tire, measured inpounds per square inch (psi) orkilopascals (kPa) before a tire has
built up heat from driving.Curb Weight: This means the weightof a motor vehicle with standard andoptional equipment including the maxi-mum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant,but without passengers and cargo.DOT Markings: A code molded intothe sidewall of a tire signifying that thetire is in compliance with the U.S.Department of Transportation motorvehicle safety standards. The DOTcode includes the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN), an alphanumeric desig-nator which can also identify the tire
6. Maximum load ratingThis number indicates the maxi-mum load in kilograms and poundsthat can be carried by the tire. When
replacing the tires on the vehicle,always use a tire that has the sameload rating as the factory installedtire.
7. Uniform Tire Quality Grading(UTQG):Tire manufacturers are required tograde tires based on three perfor-mance factors: treadwear, tractionand temperature resistance. Formore information, see Uniform TireQuality Grading on page 8-15.
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 251/271
stee o ot e e o c g ate a s.Bead: The tire bead contains steelwires wrapped by steel cords that holdthe tire onto the rim.Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire inwhich the plies are laid at alternateangles less than 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
nator which can also identify the tiremanufacturer, production plant, brandand date of production.GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight RatingGAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rat-ing for the front Axle.GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating
for the rear axle.
8CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS
9
Intended Outboard Sidewall: Theside of an asymmetrical tire, that mustalways face outward when mounted ona vehicle.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit forair pressure.Load Index: An assigned number rang-ing from 1 to 279 that corresponds tothe load carrying capacity of a tire.Maximum Inflation Pressure: Themaximum air pressure to which a coldtire may be inflated. The maximum airpressure is molded onto the sidewall.Maximum Load Rating: The load rat-ing for a tire at the maximum permis-sible inflation pressure for that tire.Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight:The sum of curb weight; accessory
Occupant Distribution: Designatedseating positions.Outward Facing Sidewall: The sideof a asymmetrical tire that has a par-
ticular side that faces outward whenmounted on a vehicle. The side of thetire that contains a whitewall, bearswhite lettering or bears manufacturer,brand and or model name molding thatis higher or deeper than the samemoldings on the other sidewall of thetire.Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire usedon passenger cars and some light dutytrucks and multipurpose vehicles.Recommended Inflation Pressure:Vehicle manufacturer's recommendedtire inflation pressure and shown on
Rim: A metal support for a tire andupon which the tire beads are seated.Sidewall: The portion of a tire be-tween the tread and the bead.
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric codeassigned to a tire indicating the maxi-mum speed at which a tire can oper-ate.Traction: The friction between the tireand the road surface. The amount ofgrip provided.Tread: The portion of a tire that comesinto contact with the road.Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands,sometimes called "wear bars," thatshow across the tread of a tire whenonly 2/32 inch of tread remains.UTQGS: Uniform Tire Quality Grading
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 252/271
e su o cu b we g t; accesso yweight; vehicle capacity weight; andproduction options weight.Normal Occupant Weight: The num-ber of occupants a vehicle is designedto seat multiplied by 150 pounds (68kg).
pthe tire placard.Radial Ply tire: A pneumatic tire inwhich the ply cords that extend to thebeads are laid at 90 degrees to thecenterline of the tread.
UTQGS: Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards, a tire information systemthat provides consumers with ratingsfor a tire's traction, temperature andtreadwear. Ratings are determined bytire manufacturers using governmenttesting procedures. The ratings are
molded into the sidewall of the tire.
8 CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS
10
I040A01O-AAT
SNOW TIRES
If you equip your car with snow tires,they should be the same size and
have the same load capacity as theoriginal tires. Snow tires should beinstalled on all four wheels; otherwise,poor handling may result.Snow tires should carry 4 psi (28 kPa)more air pressure than the pressurerecommended for the standard tires on
the tire label on the driver's side of thecenter pillar , or up to the maximumpressure shown on the tire sidewallwhichever is less.Do not drive faster than 75 mph (120km/h) when your car is equipped withsnow tires.
I040B01JM-AAT
ALL SEASON TIRES
Hyundai specifies all season tires onsome models to provide good perfor-
mance for use all year round, includingsnowy and icy road conditions. All sea-son tires are identified by ALL SEA-SON and/or M+S (Mud and Snow) onthe tire sidewall. Snow tires have bettersnow traction than all season tires anmay be more appropriate in some areas.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The num-ber of designated seating positionsmultiplied by 150 lbs. (68 kg) plus therated cargo and luggage load.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire:Load on an individual tire due to curband accessory weight plus maximumoccupant and cargo weight.Vehicle Normal Load on the Tire:That load on an individual tire that isdetermined by distributing to each axleits share of the curb weight, accessoryweight, and normal occupant weightand driving by 2.Vehicle Placard: A label permanentlyattached to a vehicle showing the origi-nal equipment tire size and recom-mended inflation pressure.
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 253/271
p
8CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS
11
!
!
I050A01MC-AAT
TIRE CHAINS
Tire chains, if necessary, should beinstalled on the front wheels. Be sure
that the chains are installed in accor-dance with the manufacturer's instruc-tions.
To minimize tire and chain wear, donot continue to use tire chains whenthey are no longer needed.
WARNING:o If your vehicle is equipped with
P205/45R16 size tires, do not in-stall tire chains. This may causedamage to the vehicle (wheels,
o If you have noise caused bychains contacting the body, re-tighten the chain to avoid contactwith the vehicle body.
o To prevent body damage, re-tighten the chains after driving0.3~0.6 miles.
o Don't use tire chains on a vehicle
equipped with aluminium wheels.If it is unavoidable, use wire typechains.
o Use wire chains less than 15 mmto prevent damage to the chain'sconnection.
WARNING:
I060A02A-AAT
TIRE ROTATION
Tires should be rotated every 7,500miles (12,000 km). If you notice thattires are wearing unevenly betweenrotations, have the car checked by aHyundai dealer so the cause may be
HEF-241
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 254/271
suspension and body) by chainscontacting the body.o When driving on roads covered
with snow or ice, drive at lessthan 20 mph (30 km/h).
o Use the SAE "S" class or wire &plastic chains.
corrected.After rotating, adjust the tire pressuresand be sure to check the wheel nuttorque.
8 CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS
12
I090A05A-AAT
WHEN TO REPLACE TIRES
Tread wearindicator
The original tires on your car havetread wear indicators. The location oftread wear indicators is shown by the"TWI" or " " marks, etc., The treadwear indicators appear when the tread
OMC055017
! WARNING:o Do not use the temporary spare
tire for tire rotation.o Do not mix bias ply and radial ply
tires under any circumstances.This may cause unusual handlingcharacteristics that could resultin death, serious injury, or prop-erty damage.
I070A01A-AAT
TIRE BALANCING
A tire that is out of balance may affecthandling and tire wear. The tires onyour Hyundai were balanced beforethe car was delivered but may needbalancing again during the years youown the car.Whenever a tire is dismounted forrepair, it should be rebalanced beforebeing reinstalled on the car.
I080A01A-AAT
TIRE TRACTION
Tire traction can be reduced if youdrive on worn tires, tires that are im-
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 255/271
depth is 0.06 in. (1.6 mm). The tireshould be replaced when these appearas a solid bar across two or moregrooves of the tread. Always replaceyour tires with those of the recom-mended size. If you change wheels,the new wheel's rim width and offsetmust meet Hyundai specification.
properly inflated or on slippery roadsurfaces. Tires should be replacedwhen tread wear indicators appear. Toreduce the possibility of losing control,slow down whenever there is rain,snow or ice on the road.
8CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS
13
!
!! WARNING:To reduce the chance or serious orfatal injuries from an accidentcaused by tire failure or loss ofvehicle control:o Replace tires that are worn, show
uneven wear, or are damaged.Worn tires can cause loss of brak-ing effectiveness, steering con-trol, and traction.
o Do not drive your vehicle with toolittle or too much pressure inyour tires. This can lead to un-even wear and tire failure.
o When replacing tires, never mixradial and bias-ply tires on thesame car. You must replace all
( l d h ) f
I090B02JM-AAT
TIRE MAINTENANCE
In addition to proper inflation, correctwheel alignment helps to decrease tirewear. If you find a tire is worn un-evenly, have your dealer check thewheel alignment.
When you have new tires installed,make sure they are balanced. This willincrease vehicle ride comfort and tire
life. Additionally, a tire shoud alwaysbe rebalanced if it is removed from thewheel.
o Wheels that do not meet Hyundai'sspecifications may fit poorly and
result in damage to the vehicle orunusual handling and poor ve-hicle control.
o Tires degrade over time, even whenthey are not being used. Regard-less of the remaining tread, it isrecommended that tires tread, It is
recommended that tires generallybe replaced after 6 years of normalservice. Heat caused by hot cli-mates or frequent high loadingconditions can accelerate the ag-ing process. Failure to follow thisWarning can result in sudden tirefailure, which could lead to a loss
WARNING:
WARNING:o Underinflated or overinflated tires
h dl l f
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 256/271
tires (including the spare) if mov-ing from radial to bias-ply tires.o Using tires and wheel other than
the recommended sizes couldcause unusual handling charac-teristics and poor vehicle con-trol, resulting in a serious acci-dent.
of control and an accident involv-ing serious injury or death.
o The ABS works by comparing thespeed of the wheels. Tire size canaffect wheel speed. When replac-ing tires, all 4 tires must use thesame size originally supplied withthe vehicle. Using tires of a differ-ent size can cause the ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) (If Installed)to work irregularly.
can cause poor handling, loss ofvehicle control, and sudden tirefailure leading to accidents, inju-ries, and even death. Alwayscheck tires are properly inflatedbefore driving. Refer to pages 2-20 and 8-3 for proper tire pres-sures and further information.
8 CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS
14
! WARNING:
I100A01MC-AAT
SPARE TIRE AND TOOLSI110A01A-AAT
SHOP MANUAL
A Hyundai Shop Manual is available fromyour authorized Hyundai dealer. It's writ-ten for professional technicians, but is
simple enough for most mechanically-inclined owners to understand.
D060B01MC A
o Driving on tires with no or insuf-ficient tread is dangerous. Worn-
out tires can result in loss ofvehicle control, collisions, andinjury and even death. Worn-outtires should be replaced as soonas possible and should never beused for driving. Always check tire tread before driving your car.
Refer to this page for further in-formation and tread limits.
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 257/271
Your Hyundai is delivered with thefollowing:
Spare tire and wheelJack, Towing hook (If Installed)Wrench bar, Wheel nut wrench
D060B01MC-A
8CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS
15CONSUMER INFORMATION
I130A01A-AAT
This consumer information has been pre-pared in accordance with regulations is-sued by the National Highway TrafficSafety Administration of the U.S. Depart-
ment of Transportation. It provides thepurchasers and/or prospective purchas-ers of Hyundai automobiles with informa-tion on uniform tire quality grading. YourHyundai dealer will help answer anyquestions you may have as you read thisinformation.
I130B05A-AAT
Tire Quality Grading
Department of Transportation qualitygrades - All passenger vehicle tiresmust conform to Federal motor vehicleSafety Standards in addition to thesegrades. These quality grades aremolded on the sidewall.
Treadwear - The treadwear grade is acomparative rating based on the wear
rate of the tire when tested undercontrolled conditions on a specifiedgovernment test course. For example,a tire graded 150 would wear one anda half (1 - 1/2) times as well on thegovernment course as a tire graded100. The relative performance of tiresd d th t l diti f
WARRANTIES FOR YOURHYUNDAI VEHICLE
I120A03A-AAT
Please consult your Owner's Handbook & Warranty Information booklet for yourvehicle's specific warranty coverage.
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 258/271
depends upon the actual conditions oftheir use, however, and may departsignificantly from the norm due tovariations in driving habits, servicepractices and differences in road char-acteristics and climate.
8 CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS
16
Temperature A, B, C - The tempera-ture grades are A (the highest), B, andC, representing the tire's resistance tothe generation of heat and its ability todissipate heat when tested under con-trolled conditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustained hightemperature can cause the material ofthe tire to degenerate and reduce tirelife, and excessive temperature canlead to sudden tire failure. The grade C
corresponds to a level of performancewhich all passenger car tires mustmeet under the Federal Motor VehicleSafety Standard No. 109. Grades Band A represent higher levels of perfor-mance on the laboratory test wheelthan the minimum required by law.
! WARNING:The temperature grade for this tireis established for a tire that is prop-erly inflated and not overloaded.Excessive speed, underinflation, orexcessive loading, either separatelyor in combination, can cause heatbuildup and possible tire failure.
Uniform Tire Quality GradingQuality grades can be found whereapplicable on the tire sidewall betweentread shoulder and maximum sectionwidth.For example:
TREAD wear 200
!
Traction AA, A, B, C - The tractiongrades, from highest to lowest, areAA, A, B, and C. Those grades repre-sent the tire's ability to stop on wetpavement as measured under con-
trolled conditions on specified govern-ment test surfaces of asphalt andconcrete. A tire marked C may havepoor traction performance.
WARNING:The traction grade assigned to thistire is based on straight-ahead brak-ing traction tests, and does not in-clude acceleration, cornering, hy-droplaning, or peak traction charac-teristics.
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 259/271
TREAD wear 200TRACTION AATEMPERATUE A
8CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS
17
Southern Region : Florida, Georgia, NorthCarolina, South Carolina.
Southern Region270 Riverside Parkway, Suite A
Austell, GA 30168(800) 633-5151
South Central Region : Alabama, Arkan-sas, Louisiana, Mississippi, Missouri, NewMexico, Oklahoma, Tennessee, Texas.
South Central Region
1421 South Beltline Road, Suite 400Coppell, TX 75019(800) 633-5151
Central Region : Illinois, Indiana, lowa,Kentucky, Michigan, Minnesota, Ne-braska, North Dakota, South Dakota, Ohio,Wisconsin, Kansas, Missouri.
Western Region : Alaska, Hawaii, Arizona,Colorado, ldaho, Montana, Nevada, Or-egon, Utah, Washington, Wyoming.
Western Region
10550 Talbert AvenueP.O.Box 20850Fountain Valley, California 92728-0850(800) 633-5151
California Region : California
California Region
10550 Talbert AvenueP.O. Box 20850Fountain Valley, California 92728-0850(800) 633-5151
I130D05A-AAT
Hyundai motor vehicles are designedand manufactured to meet or exceed allapplicable safety standards.
For your safety, however, we stronglyurge you to read and follow all directionsin this Owner's Manual, particularly theinformation under the headings "NOTE","CAUTION" and "WARNING" .
If, after reading this manual, you haveany questions regarding the operation ofyour vehicle, please contact your nearestHyundai Motor America Regional Officeas listed below:
Eastern Region : Connecticut, Delaware,Maine, Massachusetts, New Hampshire,New Jersey, New York, Pennsylvania,Rhode Island, Vermont.
Eastern Region
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 260/271
Central Region1705 Sequoia DriveAurora, Illinois 60506(800) 633-5151
Eastern Region1100 Cranbury South River RoadJamesburg, NJ 08831(800) 633-5151
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 261/271
Measurement ................................................................ 9-2Engine ........................................................................... 9-3Lubrication Chart ........................................................... 9-4
VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS
9
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 262/271
9
9 VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS
2
Tire Size
P175/70 R14, P185/65 R14, P195/55 R15
P175/70 R14, P185/65 R14, P205/45 R16
T115/70 D15
in. (mm)
Liter
45
4Door
3Door
Spare
US. gal
11.9Fuel tank capacity
Imp.gal
9.9
Inflation Pressure
32PSI (220 kPa)
60PSI (420 kPa)
J010A03MC-AAT
MEASUREMENT
J020A01MC-AAT
POWER STEERING
J060A01A-AAT
FUEL SYSTEM
J050A02MC-AATBRAKE
J030A03MC-AAT
TIRE
4 DOOR169.3 (4300)
66.7 (1695)57.8 (1470)98.4 (2500)
57.8 (1470) / 58.4 (1485)*
57.4 (1460) / 58 (1475)*
ItemOverall length
Overall widthOverall heightWheel base
Wheel tread Front
Rear
3 DOOR159.2 (4045)
Type
Wheel free play
Rack stroke
Rack and pinion
0 ~ 1.18 in (0 ~ 30 mm)
5.59 in. (142 mm)175 Tire only
* with P175/70R14 Tire
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 263/271
Dual hydraulic with brake booster
Ventilated disc
Drum
Cable operated on rear wheel
Type
Front brake type
Rear brake type
Parking brake
BRAKE
Oil pump type
( )5.43 in. (138 mm)
Vane type
yExcept 175 Tire
9VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS
3ENGINE
SPECIFICATIONS
1.6 MPI
4-Cylinder in-line DOHC
3.01 x 3.42 in. (76.5 x 87 mm)
1,599
700 ± 100
BTDC 5° ± 5°
1 - 3 - 4 - 2
J070A02MC-AAT
ITEMS
Engine Type
Bore x StrokeDisplacement (cc)Idle Speed (RPM)
Ignition timing (Base)
Firing order
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 264/271
9 VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS
4
Oil & Grease Standard
API Service SM* or above,
ILSAC GF-4 or above
HYUNDAI GENUINE PARTS MTF 75W/85 (API GL-4)
HYUNDAI GENUINE ATF SP III, DIAMOND ATF SP III, SK ATF SP III or other
brands meeting the SP III specification approved by Hyundai Motor Co.
PSF-3
DOT 3, DOT 4 or Equivalent
Ethylene glycol base for aluminum radiator
SAE 5W-20, 5W-30
(ALL TEMP. RANGE)
SAE 10W-30 [ABOVE 0°F (-18°C)]
LUBRICATION CHART
Item
Engine oil
Recommends
Transaxle Manual
Automatic
Power steering
Brake fluid
Coolant Manual
Transaxle
Automatic
J080A02MC-AAT
Q'ty (US.QTS)(Imp.qts, liter)
Drain and refill
Without oil filter : 3.17 (2.6, 3.0)
With oil filter : 3.48 (2.9, 3.3)
2 (1.67, 1.9)
6.44 (5.3, 6.1)
As required
As required
5.49 (4.5, 5.2)
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 265/271
Automatic
Transaxle5.60 (4.6, 5.3)
* : If the API service SM engine oil is not available in your country, you are able to use API service SL.
10
INDEX
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 266/271
10
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 267/271
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 268/271
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 269/271
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 270/271
10 INDEX
6
TransaxleAutomatic .......................................................................... 2-9Automatic transaxle fluid checking ................................ 6-12Manual .............................................................................. 2-6Manual transaxle oil checking ....................................... 6-12
Trip Computer .................................................................... 1-73Trip Odometer .......................................................... 1-71, 1-72Trunk Lid/Tail Gate............................................................. 1-96
Remote trunk lid release ................................................ 1-97
V
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .................................... 8-2
Vehicle Load Limit ............................................................. 2-20Vehicle Specifications .......................................................... 9-1
W
Warning and Indicator Lights ............................................ 1-64Warranties for Your Hyundai Vehicle ............................... 8-15Windows ............................................................................. 1-11
Window lock .................................................................... 1-12Windshield Wiper and Washer Switch .............................. 1-78
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 271/271
Adjustable Intermittent wiper operation ......................... 1-80Mist wiper operation ....................................................... 1-79Rear window wiper and washer .................................... 1-80Washer reservoir ............................................................ 6-11Windshield washer operation ........................................ 1-79
Windshield Wiper Blades .................................................. 6-10